JP2019030490A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine with enhanced performance effects.SOLUTION: A Pachinko game machine is provided with selection means which presents a plurality of selection candidates (for example, runners) (for example, makes two runners appear in a race performance) and selects any of the plurality of presented selection candidates (for example, any of the two runners is made to win in the race performance). The selection means selects none of the plurality of selection candidates (for example, both runners stop racing in the race performance) at a higher rate when the plurality of presented selection candidates do not include a first selection candidates (runners belonging to the first group) low in the degree of advantage than when the plurality of presented selection candidates include a first selection candidate.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 20

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  For example, Patent Document 1 discloses a gaming machine including a selection unit that presents a plurality of selection candidates (options) and selects any one of the presented plurality of selection candidates.

JP 2013-223677 A

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the effect of production is not enhanced.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine with enhanced performance effects.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention provides:
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 901, etc.) that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state,
A plurality of selection candidates (for example, runners) are presented (for example, two runners appear in a race effect), and one of the presented selection candidates is selected (for example, a race effect) (E.g., winning one of the two runners) and selecting means (for example, the production control CPU 120),
Specific display means for performing specific display in which the display mode can be changed in stages according to the degree of advantage (for example, CPU 90120 for effect control for performing specific display effects);
Special notification execution means (for example, a CPU 90120 for effect control that performs abnormality notification) capable of executing a special notification for notifying information related to a game,
As selection candidates that can be presented, the first selection candidates (for example, blue runners and green runners (runners of the first group) with relatively low jackpot expectation) and the first selection candidates when selected A second selection candidate (for example, a red runner and a rainbow runner (second group of runners) having a relatively high jackpot expectation) having a high advantage (for example, a jackpot expectation),
The selection means presents the plurality of selections presented when the plurality of presented selection candidates do not include the first selection candidate (for example, when only a red runner or a rainbow runner appears in the race effect). When the first selection candidate is included in the candidates (for example, when a blue or green runner appears in a race effect), any of the plurality of selection candidates is higher (for example, see FIGS. 20 and 21). (For example, a pattern in which both runners stop racing during the race)
The specific display means changes the display mode of the specific display when a predetermined period has elapsed after the display mode of the specific display is notified to change (for example, an icon as a specific display is displayed). Notification of specific display change notification is continuously performed for a predetermined period of time, and then an icon is displayed (specific display changes, etc.)
The notification execution means can execute the special notification even during a predetermined period after it is notified that the display mode of the specific display is changed (for example, it is notified that an icon as the specific display is displayed). For example, it is possible to report an abnormality within a predetermined period thereafter)
It is characterized by that.

  According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced. In addition, it is possible to grasp the gaming situation even in a predetermined period after it is notified that the display mode of the specific display is changed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interest.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
The selection means can present a plurality of selection candidates at a plurality of timings including a first timing and a second timing (see, for example, FIGS. 21 and 23),
When a plurality of selection candidates not including the first selection candidate is presented at the first timing, the ratio of selecting any of the plurality of selection candidates is different (for example, when presented at the second timing (for example, FIG. 21)
You may do it.

  According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

(3) In the above gaming machine (1) or (2),
Further provided is a special effect execution means (for example, a CPU 120 for effect control) for executing a special effect (for example, one announcement) having a high advantage,
When a plurality of selection candidates not including the first selection candidate are presented, any of the plurality of selection candidates is more when the special effect is executed than when the special effect is not executed. Is high (see, for example, FIG. 21)
You may do it.

  According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

(4) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (3),
The advantage when none of the plurality of selection candidates is selected is lower than the advantage when any of the plurality of selection candidates is selected (see, for example, FIGS. 20 and 21).
You may do it.

  According to such a configuration, the player pays attention to whether or not the selection candidate is selected, so that the effect of production can be enhanced.

(5) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (4),
The selection means includes
A plurality of selection candidates can be presented at a plurality of timings including a first timing and a second timing after the first timing (see, for example, FIGS. 21 and 23).
A plurality of selection candidates are presented such that the respective advantages of the plurality of selection candidates presented at the second timing are not lower than the advantages of the plurality of selection candidates presented at the first timing (for example, FIG. 21),
You may do it.

  According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

(6) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (5),
A specific display control means (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control in the first modification) capable of changing the display mode of the specific display (for example, the meter M or the like) in a stepwise manner according to the degree of advantage;
After performing a common introduction effect (for example, an effect of displaying the card G and “pseudo ream?”, Etc.), a successful effect (for example, turning over the card G, the letters “pseudo ream” are written on the turned card G). A specific effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect, etc.) is performed to perform one of a certain effect or the like (for example, an effect in which the card G is turned and nothing is written on the flipped card G). Specific production execution means (for example, CPU 120 for production control in modification 1),
The specific effect executing means is configured to execute the specific effect (for example, pseudo) in which the failure effect is performed in a predetermined period (for example, another effect execution limit period) after it is notified that the display mode of the specific display is changed. (For example, see FIG. 27)
You may do it.

  According to such a structure, the fall of the interest of a game can be prevented.

  The modes for carrying out the invention to be described later include the inventions according to the following (7) to (15). Conventionally, as a gaming machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, the game medium is won in a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, and an execution condition (start condition) is set. When established, a plurality of types of identification information (hereinafter also referred to as “display symbols”) are variably displayed on a variable display device, and a so-called variable display game is determined in accordance with the display result to determine whether or not to give a predetermined game value. There is a pachinko machine that has enhanced the game fun. In such a pachinko gaming machine, when the stop symbol form when the variable display of the display symbol in the variable display game is completely stopped becomes the specific display aspect, the player is in an advantageous state (big hit game state). For example, a pachinko gaming machine that has become a big hit gaming state has a special electric combination called a big prize opening or an attacker that is in an open state, making it very easy to win a game ball and giving a predetermined gaming value to a player. Provide continuously for a certain period of time. In such a pachinko gaming machine, before the display result is derived and displayed on the variable display device, various types of effects that cause the player to expect the display result to be in a specific display mode are executed. As such a gaming machine, as shown in JP-A-2015-160056, after a plurality of images are displayed as a specific display, the display mode of the specific display is changed by combining the plurality of images. There is a gaming machine that performs the effect of changing the display mode of the specific display. However, in this gaming machine, if the information regarding the game is not notified within a predetermined period after the player is recognized to change the display mode of the specific display, the game situation cannot be grasped, and the gaming interest is reduced. There is a fear. In view of this point, provision of a gaming machine that can prevent a decrease in gaming interest is desired.

(7) In order to achieve the above object, another aspect of the gaming machine is:
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901 or the like) that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state,
Specific display means for performing specific display in which the display mode can be changed in stages according to the degree of advantage (for example, CPU 90120 for effect control for performing specific display effects);
Special notification execution means (for example, a CPU 90120 for effect control that performs abnormality notification) capable of executing a special notification for notifying information related to a game,
The specific display means changes the display mode of the specific display when a predetermined period has elapsed after the display mode of the specific display is notified to change (for example, an icon as a specific display is displayed). Notification of specific display change notification is continuously performed for a predetermined period of time, and then an icon is displayed (specific display changes, etc.)
The notification execution means can execute the special notification even during a predetermined period after it is notified that the display mode of the specific display is changed (for example, it is notified that an icon as the specific display is displayed). For example, it is possible to report an abnormality within a predetermined period thereafter)
It is characterized by that.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to grasp the gaming situation even in a predetermined period after it is notified that the display mode of the specific display is changed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interest.

(8) In the gaming machine of (7) above,
It further includes special effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 90120 for executing a pseudo-joint effect) capable of executing a special effect for performing either a successful effect or a failure effect after performing a common introduction effect,
The specific display means can change the display mode of the specific display when the effect result of the predetermined effect is the specific result (for example, an icon as the specific display is displayed when the effect result of the predetermined effect indicates success). Such),
The special effect execution means is configured so that the success effect is executed at a high rate during a period from when the effect result of the predetermined effect is shown to be a specific result until the display mode of the specific display changes. Execute a special effect (for example, determine a timing at which the execution period of the failure effect and the execution period of the specific display effect do not overlap as the execution timing of the specific display effect),
You may do it.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interest.

(9) In the gaming machine of (7) or (8) above,
The specific display means changes the display mode of the specific display in stages by displaying different types of special images in stages (for example, when a plurality of specific display effects are performed, the specific display is displayed in stages. Icons increase),
Depending on the combination of the displayed special images, one of a plurality of types of effects with different ratios controlled to the advantageous state is executed at different ratios (for example, icons to be displayed (icon combinations) are variably displayed) Depending on the outcome, etc.)
You may do it.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to attract the player's attention to which special image is displayed.

(10) In the gaming machine according to (8) or (9) above,
There are a plurality of start timings of the predetermined effect, and the ratio at which the effect result of the predetermined effect becomes the specific result depends on which timing the start timing of the predetermined effect is (for example, according to the execution timing of the predetermined effect) For example, the percentage of performance results for a given performance is different)
You may do it.

  According to such a configuration, the player's attention can be gathered with respect to the start timing of the predetermined effect.

(11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (7) to (10) above,
Corresponding display means for performing corresponding display corresponding to variable display (for example, CPU 90120 for effect control for performing active display);
And a corresponding display changing means for changing the display mode of the corresponding display (such as a CPU 90120 for effect control for performing an active display change effect),
Depending on the combination of the display mode of the corresponding display and the display mode of the specific display, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, the display mode of the active display and the display mode of the specific display (number and combination of icons)) The ratio of variable display results to “big hit” varies depending on the combination of
You may do it.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect.

(12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (7) to (11) above,
A specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect informing the degree of advantage (for example, an effect control CPU 90120 for executing a reach effect of super reach);
Special change effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 90120 for executing a special change effect) capable of executing a special change effect for changing the display mode of the specific display when the specific effect is executed; In addition,
The special change effect execution means is capable of executing the special change effect in a manner that has priority over the specific effect (for example, interrupting the super reach effect and executing the special change effect).
You may do it.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the specific display mode in a mode that has priority over the specific performance, so it is possible to focus attention on the change in the specific display mode even when the specific performance is executed.

(13) In the gaming machine according to any one of (7) to (12) above,
Provided with a selection means that presents a plurality of selection candidates and can select one of the presented plurality of selection candidates (for example, an effect control CPU 90120 that executes a race effect as a predetermined effect),
The plurality of selection candidates include a first selection candidate and a second selection candidate that has a higher advantage than the first candidate when selected (for example, the success expectation level as a result of a predetermined effect is compared) A selection candidate belonging to the first group that is relatively low, and a selection candidate belonging to the second group that has a relatively high degree of success expectation as a result of the predetermined performance, etc.)
The selection means is configured such that when the plurality of presented selection candidates do not include the first selection candidate, any of the plurality of selection candidates is higher in proportion than when the plurality of presented selection candidates include the first selection candidate. Do not select (for example, the second cancellation rate is set higher than the first cancellation rate)
You may do it.

  According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

(14) In the gaming machine according to any one of (7) to (13) above,
The special notification execution means is capable of executing abnormality display as the special notification based on the abnormality determination, and in a predetermined period after the notification that the display mode of the specific display is changed The abnormality display can be started even when abnormality determination is performed (for example, abnormality notification is possible within a predetermined period after notification that an icon as a specific display is displayed).
You may do it.

  According to such a configuration, error display can be suitably performed.

(15) In the gaming machine according to any one of (7) to (14),
The special notification execution means can update the display of the number of balls earned as the special notification even during a predetermined period after it is notified that the display mode of the specific display is changed (for example, an icon as the specific display is displayed). You can update the number of winnings within a certain period of time after being notified that it will be displayed)
You may do it.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably notify the number of winning balls.

  In the present specification, expressions for comparison of various ratios such as performance execution ratios (expressions such as “high”, “low”, and “different”) include that one is a ratio of “0%”. But you can. For example, one of the ratios is “0%” and the other is a ratio of “100%” or a ratio of less than “100%”.

  In this specification, “restriction” includes not only prohibition but also lowering various ratios such as an execution ratio.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in one embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is a figure which shows an example of a 1st special figure reservation memory part and a 2nd special figure reservation memory part. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a jackpot classification determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a figure which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the variation pattern determination table for big hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss. It is a figure which shows the example of a processing content of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is a figure which shows the execution decision example of a one-shot notice. It is a figure which shows the execution decision example of a race production. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the color of the runner who appears in a race production, and jackpot expectation degree. It is a figure which shows the example 1 of determination of the production pattern of a race production. It is a figure which shows the example 2 and 3 of the determination of the production pattern of a race production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production process during variable display. It is a figure which shows the example of execution timing of various effects. It is a figure which shows the example of a production screen of a race production. It is a figure which shows the example of a production screen of a race production. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect screen of the modification 1. It is a figure which shows examples, such as the execution timing of an effect, and another production execution restriction period. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure holding | maintenance memory | storage part. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a specific display effect execution setting process. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a specific display effect execution determination table and a specific display effect execution mode determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of an execution timing determination table. It is a timing chart which shows the detail of a specific display effect. It is a timing chart which shows the execution timing of a specific display effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a notification effect execution setting process. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a notice effect execution decision table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the execution timing determination table referred in order to determine the execution timing of a notice effect. It is a timing chart which shows the execution timing of the notice effect when a specific display effect is performed. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production process during variable display. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement when a specific display production | presentation and a failure production | presentation are performed. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement when a specific display production | presentation and a successful production are performed. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement in the case of performing a specific display production and a notice production. FIG. 53 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect operation when an abnormality occurs at the timing “X” illustrated in FIG. 52. FIG. 53 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect operation when an effect setting is performed by a player at the timing of “X” illustrated in FIG. 52. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement in the case of performing a race production as a predetermined production. When the specific display effect is performed and the meter display changes from the normal mode to the first level display mode, and the active display change effect in which the active display changes to the first mode according to the change of the meter display is executed. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. The example of the production | presentation operation | movement in case a super reach production is performed independently is shown. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement in case a specific display production and an active display change production are performed when a super reach production is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement in case a specific display production and an active display change production are performed when a super reach production is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the display mode in the case of setting a function of an auto button to valid or invalid. It is explanatory drawing which shows the comparative example of the automatic continuous hit by long press operation, and the automatic continuous hit by an auto button function.

(Pachinko machine 1)
(Configuration of pachinko machine 1)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched into a game area from a predetermined hitting device.

  In a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special figure game) of special symbols (also called special figures) as a plurality of types of special identification information. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. These consist of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and the special symbol may be a number indicating “0” to “9” or a lighting pattern such as “−”. The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

  Note that “variable display” of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are changed (displayed in a variable manner) by update display or the like (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped as a display result (variable display result) (also referred to as a derivation display) (the same applies to other variable displays described later). Note that scroll display, deformation, enlargement / reduction, and the like may be performed as variations in symbols (in particular, decorative symbols described later).

  In the following, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is "second special symbol". Also called. In addition, the special figure game using the first special figure is referred to as a “first special figure game”, and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a “second special figure game”.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images.

  On the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, a plurality of types of decorative symbols (such as symbols indicating numerals) that are different from the special symbols can be changed. Display is performed. As an example, on the screen of the image display device 5, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are synchronized with the first special game or the second special game. , Variable display of decorative symbols (for example, vertical scroll display or update display) is performed.

  On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area 5H is also arranged. In the display area 5H, a first hold display image (here, a circle image) and a second hold display image (here, a round image) corresponding to a special figure game (variable display of decorative symbols) that has been put on hold are displayed. Image) is displayed. The first hold display image indicates the first special game (pending display of decorative symbols) that is being held, and is displayed right-aligned in the left area of the display area 5H. The second hold display image indicates the second special figure game (decorative display of decorative symbols) whose execution is put on hold, and is displayed left-justified in the right area of the display area 5H.

  Note that the number of special figure games held is also referred to as a special figure holding memory number. In particular, the number of holds of the first special figure game is referred to as a first special figure hold memory number. The number of holds of the second special figure game is referred to as the second special figure hold memory number. The number of first reserved display images indicates the first special figure reserved memory number, and the number of second reserved display images indicates the second special figure reserved memory number. The first hold display image and the second hold display image may be collectively referred to as a hold display image.

  When the held first special game is executed (digested), the already displayed first held display images shift to the right, and the rightmost first held display image (the first special display game to be digested). The image corresponding to the figure game) is deleted. When the held second special game is executed (digested), the already displayed second reserved display images are shifted to the left, and the leftmost second reserved display image (digested second special image is displayed). The image corresponding to the figure game) is deleted.

  In addition, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B are provided for displaying the special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner. Each of the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B includes a plurality of LEDs, and displays the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number depending on the number of LEDs lit. To do.

  Below the image display device 5, an ordinary winning ball device 6A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

  The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning opening that is maintained in a certain open state in which a game ball can always enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, the first start port switch 22A (see FIG. 2) is turned on, thereby detecting the entry of the game ball (at this time, a predetermined number (for example, three) ) And the first special figure game can be started.)

  The normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is an electric tulip type hand having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed between a closed state in a vertical position and an open state in a tilted position by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2) for a normal electric accessory. The object (ordinary electric accessory) is provided, and the second start winning opening is formed. In the normal variable winning ball device 6B, for example, when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position, so that the tip of the movable wing piece comes close to the normal winning ball device 6A, and the second start winning prize is obtained. The game ball enters a closed state where the game ball does not enter the mouth (the second start winning port is also referred to as a closed state). On the other hand, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening by moving the movable wing piece to the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second ball). It is also said that the start winning opening is opened.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, the second start port switch 22B (see FIG. 2) is turned on, thereby detecting the entry of the game ball (at this time, a predetermined number (for example, three) ) And the second special figure game can be started.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2) that is used for the large winning opening door. Form a big prize opening as an area.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is in the off state, the big winning opening door closes the big winning opening and the game ball enters the big winning opening (for example, Cannot pass). On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the ON state, the special prize opening door opens the big prize opening, so that the game ball can easily enter the special prize opening. Become.

  When a game ball enters the big prize opening, the count switch 23 (see FIG. 2) is turned on, and thereby the entry of the game ball is detected. At this time, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when game balls enter the grand prize winning opening, for example, more prize balls are paid out than when game balls enter the first start winning opening or the second start winning opening.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and can display variable symbols of ordinary symbols (also called “ordinary symbols” or “ordinary symbols”) as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbols. Do. Such variable display of normal symbols is also referred to as a general game (also referred to as a “normal game”).

  The usual game is executed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the gate switch 21 of FIG. 2 is turned on, and thereby the passage of the game ball is detected.

  Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general figure hold display unit 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of general figure hold storage, which is the number of general figure games that are being executed, by the number of lighted LEDs.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

  In the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like for launching a game ball as a game medium toward a game area by a hitting ball launching device is provided. Yes.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. )) Is provided. Below the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a lower plate that holds (stores) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, and a relay board 15 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are disposed on the back of the game board or the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and transmits an effect control command to the effect control board 12 for controlling the progress of a game (execution of a special game, a normal game, etc.) in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Including the function of The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, and the like. And a random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

  As an example, the CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to realize the function of the main board 11 (control of the progress of the game). At this time, various data (data such as variation patterns, presentation control commands, various tables) stored in the ROM 101 are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory.

  The random number circuit 104 counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals are input and an output port for transmitting various signals.

  The CPU 103, via the I / O 105, displays the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, and the general drawing hold display. A signal for controlling (driving) the device 25C and the like is output and controlled.

  The switch circuit 110 is configured to detect detection signals (game media pass or not) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch is turned on is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

  The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the grand prize opening door. To transmit.

  The effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and performs various operations based on the received effect control command. The function of executing the effects (including variable display of decorative symbols).

  On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  For example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the program stored in the ROM 121, thereby realizing the function of the effect control board 12 (execution of the effect). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 121 (data used for the effect control pattern and data such as various tables) are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

  The display control unit 123 outputs a video signal of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 120, and displays the effect image on the image display device 5. As an example, the display control unit 123 may be equipped with a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), or the like.

  The random number circuit 124 counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (rendering random numbers) used for controlling the rendering operation in an updatable manner. The effect random number may be updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 includes, for example, an input port for taking in an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and an output port for transmitting various signals.

  The sound control board 13 has a function of outputting sound (sound designated by the sound effect signal) from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound effect signal from the effect control board 12.

  The lamp control board 14 has a function of turning on / off the game effect lamp 9 (turning on / off according to the drive content indicated by the electrical decoration signal) based on the electrical decoration signal from the effect control board 12.

  The image display device 5 includes a display panel including a liquid crystal panel, an EL panel, and a driver circuit that drives the display panel. The video signal supplied from the display control unit 123 to the image display device 5 via the I / O 125 is input to the driver circuit. The driver circuit displays an image represented by the video signal on the display panel. As a result, various effect images and the like are displayed on the image display device 5.

(Progress of games, progress of production, etc.)
A game medium (game ball) is launched toward the game area by a rotation operation by the player to the hitting operation handle provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  When the game ball that has flowed down the game area passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game (variable display of normal symbols) is started. In addition, when another general game is already running, or when the normal game cannot be started (such as when the start condition is not satisfied), such as during the following opening control, the maximum number of games is limited to 4 Execution is deferred. The held ordinary game is executed when a start condition for starting the ordinary game is satisfied (for example, no other ordinary game is being executed and no release control is being performed). If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 when the number of usual reserved memories reaches the upper limit, the number of ordinary reserved memories does not increase and the passage is invalidated.

  The variable display results that are stopped and displayed in the ordinary game include a symbol per symbol (for example, a common symbol such as “7”) and a common symbol losing symbol (for example, a common symbol such as “−”). . When the symbol per symbol is stopped (derived), the variable display result is “per symbol”. The case where the usual figure losing symbol is stopped (derived) is when the variable display result is “general figure losing”.

  In the case of “per normal”, an opening control (the second start winning opening is opened) is performed in which the movable blade piece of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted for a predetermined period. The opening control is not performed in the case of “ordinary loss”.

  When the game ball flowing down the game area enters the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A, the first special game is started. Further, when the game ball enters the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the second special game is started. When the special figure game cannot be started (when the start condition is not satisfied), such as when another special figure game is already being executed or the game is controlled to the big hit game state described later, each of the four special figure games is four. Execution of the special figure game is suspended with an upper limit of The reserved special figure game is executed when a start condition capable of starting the special figure game is satisfied (other special figure games are not executed and are not in the big hit gaming state, etc.).

  When the game ball enters the first start winning opening when the first special figure reserved memory number reaches the upper limit value, the first special figure reserved memory number does not increase and the entry is invalidated ( There may be a prize ball). When the game ball enters the second start winning opening when the second special figure reserved memory number reaches the upper limit value, the second special figure reserved memory number does not increase and the entry is invalidated ( There may be a prize ball).

  The entry (winning) of a game ball that increases the number of first special figure reserved memories into the first starting winning opening is also referred to as a first starting winning. The entry (winning) of the game ball that increases the second special figure reserved memory number into the second starting winning opening is also referred to as a second starting winning. These winnings are collectively referred to simply as starting winnings.

  The variable display results stopped and displayed in the special figure game include a jackpot symbol (for example, a special symbol such as “3” and “7”) and a lost symbol (for example, a special symbol such as “−”). . When the jackpot symbol is stopped (displayed), the variable display result is “big jackpot”. The lost symbol is stopped (derived) when the variable display result is “lost”.

  When the variable display result of the first special figure game or the second special figure game is “big hit” (specific display result), the big hit gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. When the variable display result is “losing”, it is not controlled to the big hit gaming state.

  In the big hit gaming state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in an open state. The open state is until the earlier timing of an elapse timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) or a timing until the number of game balls that have entered the winning prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). Will continue. Such an open state is called a round game (also simply called “round”). In the big hit game state, the round game is repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number of times (for example, “15 times”) is reached (in the period other than the round game, the big prize opening is closed).

  In the “big hit”, the big hit types “non-probability change” and “probability change” are set. When the big hit type is “non-probable change”, the big hit symbol “3” is stopped and displayed. When the big hit type is “probability change”, the big hit symbol of “7” is stopped and displayed.

  The “big hit” when the big hit type is “probable change” may be called “probable big hit”, and the “big hit” when the big hit type is “non-probable change” may be called “non-probable big hit”. In addition, the big hit gaming state based on “probability big hit” may be referred to as “probability big hit gaming state”. Further, the big hit gaming state based on the “non-probable big hit game” may be referred to as “non-probable big hit game state”.

  After the probable big hit game state is finished, the probability that the variable display result is “big hit” (big hit probability) is controlled to be a probable state in which the probability is higher than the normal state. The probability variation state continues until the next jackpot gaming state is started.

  After the probable big hit game state or the non-probable big hit game state ends, the average variable display time (variable display period) is controlled to be short when the normal state is shorter than the normal state. In the short-time state, one of the end conditions is established first, that is, the predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 100 times) the special game is executed and the next big hit game state is started. Continue until you do.

  In the short-time state, the normally variable winning ball device 6B is opened and closed in an advantageous change mode in which the game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening as compared to the non-short-time state that is not in the short-time state such as the normal state. It may be changed. For example, the control to make the change time of the normal symbol in the normal game (the variable display period of the normal figure, also referred to as the normal change time) shorter than in the normal state, or variable display in each normal game What is necessary is just to change the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B between the open state and the closed state in an advantageous change mode by controlling the probability that the result is “per hit” as compared with the normal state. Such control is referred to as high opening control (also referred to as “time reduction control” or “high base control”). By controlling in such a short time state, the time required until the next variable display result becomes “big hit” is shortened, and the gaming state becomes more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

  The normal state is an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a gaming state other than a state advantageous for a player such as a short-time state, a probability variation state, etc. The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability of “winning” and the probability that the variable display result in the special game is “big hit” is the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed) The state is controlled in the same manner as when a predetermined return process is not executed after the input.

  The short time state is also referred to as “high base”, and the gaming state that is not in the short time state is also referred to as “low base” or “non-short time state”. The probability variation state is also referred to as “high probability”, and the gaming state that is not the probability variation state is also referred to as “low probability”, “non-probability variation”, or the like.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, this corresponds to the start of the first special game or the second special game. Then, variable display of decorative symbols (this is also a kind of effect) is started. At the timing when the variable display result (also referred to as a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special graphic game, the fixed decorative symbol (variable display result) becomes a variable decorative display result (variable display result). A combination of three decorative symbols) is also stopped (derived).

  In the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end thereof, the variable display mode of the decorative design may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to a decorative design (“reach variation” that is not yet stopped when the decorative design that is stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 forms a part of the jackpot combination described later. "Design" is also a display mode in which fluctuation continues.

  In this embodiment, the reach effect is executed in response to the reach mode during the variable display. As reach production, normal reach, super reach A, and super reach B having different production modes are prepared. In this embodiment, the jackpot expectation is higher in the order of super reach B> super reach A> normal reach.

  The big hit expectation is, for example, the ratio at which the variable display result of the special figure game becomes “big hit”, and the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization with the special figure game becomes “big hit” which will be described later. It is also a percentage.

  In addition, a “pseudo-run” may be executed before reach is established. The “pseudo-continuous” is an effect in which all the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed and then changed again a predetermined number of times (for example, up to three times). . In the following description, the number of re-variations refers to the number of times that the decorative symbol is re-variable, excluding the initial variation until the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped for the first time. In the pseudo-ream, the greater the number of re-variations, the higher the expectation of jackpot. The temporarily stopped decorative symbol may be a symbol that has been variably displayed until then, or may be a symbol that is different from the symbol that has been variably displayed until then (for example, a symbol dedicated to a pseudo-ream).

  In this embodiment, a race effect (FIGS. 24 and 25) is executed during variable display of decorative symbols. In the race performance, two runner characters with different expectations of jackpot (here, distinguished by color) race (run) and one of them wins. (The expected degree of jackpot of the winning runner is reported as the expected degree of jackpot this time). The race effect is an effect for winning any one of the runners, and is also a kind of selection effect for selecting the one runner. Moreover, in the race production, both runners appearing may stop the race (a mode in which neither is selected).

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, a notice effect of one notification is also executed. When a single announcement is executed, the expectation degree of jackpot is extremely high (here, “big hit” is confirmed). The one-shot notice may be an effect such as causing the image display device 5 to display a predetermined image for a short time, operating a not-shown accessory, or outputting a predetermined sound.

  When the variable display result of the special figure game is “big hit”, a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as a display result of variable display of the decorative pattern. (The display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is “big hit”). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, “7” for probability variation big hit, non-probable big hit, on the predetermined effective line in the “left”, “middle”, “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. "6" etc.) are all displayed at the same time.

  When the variable display result is “losing”, the fixed display pattern of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, instead of the variable display mode of the decorative pattern. There is. In addition, when the variable display result is “losing”, after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination (“reach loss combination”) that is not a big hit combination is displayed as the variable pattern display result of the decorative pattern. ”) May be stopped and displayed.

(Main operations of pachinko machine 1)
Hereinafter, the main operations of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to flowcharts and the like, but in each operation (each process), a process not described below may be performed.

(Main operations of the main board 11)
On the main board 11, the CPU 103 executes a game control timer interrupt process. The game control timer interrupt processing is performed every time a timer interrupt is generated by an interrupt request signal from a CTC (counter / timer circuit) (not shown) that is supplied every predetermined period (for example, 2 milliseconds) (at an interrupt request signal supply interval). It is executed every predetermined time (2 ms). In the game control timer interrupt process, the CPU 103 executes a switch process, a game random number update process, a special symbol process, a normal symbol process process, a command control process, etc., and the game control timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed for each timer interrupt. As a result, game control and the like are realized.

  In the switch processing, each switch is determined by determining whether a detection signal is input from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110. It is determined for each switch whether or not it is turned on (that is, whether or not a game ball has entered or passed). The result of this determination is temporarily stored in the RAM 102 or the like, and is used in special symbol process processing or normal symbol process processing.

  The game random number update process is a process for updating at least a part of a plurality of types of game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software.

  The special symbol process process is a process (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, This includes control of the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, and the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door). In the special symbol process, the transmission setting of the effect control command is performed according to the progress of the game.

  The normal symbol process is based on the judgment result in the switch process, and holds and executes the ordinary game, and the normal variable winning ball device 6B (second starting prize opening) is released at the time of each ordinary figure. This is a process (including control of the normal symbol display unit 20, the general diagram hold display unit 25C, and the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory).

  The command control process is a process of actually transmitting the effect control command transmitted and set in the special symbol process process or the like from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

(Direction control command set for transmission in special symbol process)
Next, an effect control command that is set to be transmitted in the special symbol process and transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 in the command control process will be described. FIG. 3 shows examples of main effect control commands. The following “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command is composed of MODE data and EXT data.

  Command 8000 (H) is a first variation start designation command for designating (notifying) the start of the first special figure game, that is, the start of variable display (fluctuation) of the first special figure. The command 8001 (H) is a second change start designation command for designating (notifying) the start of the second special figure game, that is, the start of the variable display (fluctuation) of the second special figure. The first variation start designation command and the second variation start designation command may be collectively referred to as a variation start designation command.

  The command 81XX (H) is used to specify a variable display fluctuation pattern (special figure or decorative pattern variable display execution time (special figure fluctuation time), or a special symbol variable display pattern. ) Is a variation pattern designation command for designating (notifying). In the command “XX” (EXT data, “XX” is the same), a numerical value corresponding to each variation pattern (see FIG. 11, which will be described in detail later) is set (for example, for the variation pattern PA1-1). "00"). The command is transmitted when the special figure game is started.

  The command 8CXX (H) is a display result designation command for designating (notifying) whether or not to make a big hit and a big hit type (that is, a variable display result). In the “XX” of the command, a numerical value corresponding to the display result is set (for example, “00” for “lost”, “01” for “probable big hit”, etc.). The command is transmitted when the special figure game is started.

  The command 8F00 (H) is a symbol determination designation command for designating (notifying) the end of the special figure game (that is, deriving and displaying the variable display result). The symbol confirmation designation command is for designating that the variable display (fluctuation) of the decorative symbols is terminated and the display result is derived and displayed. This command is transmitted at the end of the special figure game.

  The command A000 (H) is a hit start designation command for designating (notifying) the start of the big hit gaming state (also the start of fanfare). The fanfare is an effect executed at the start of the big hit gaming state, such as an effect for notifying that the big hit gaming state has been reached. This command is transmitted at the start of the jackpot gaming state.

  Command A300 (H) is a hit end specifying command for specifying (notifying) the end of the big hit gaming state (which is also the start of ending). Ending is an effect executed at the end of the jackpot gaming state, such as an effect for notifying that the jackpot gaming state is ended. This command is sent at the end of the last round game.

  Command B100 (H) is a first start winning designation command for designating (notifying) that a first start winning has occurred due to the entry of a game medium into the first starting winning opening. Command B200 (H) is a second start winning designation command for designating (notifying) that a second start winning has occurred due to the entry of a game medium into the second start winning opening. The first start prize designation command and the second start prize designation command may be collectively referred to as a start prize designation command. The start winning designation command is transmitted when a start winning is generated (at the start winning).

  Command C000 (H) is a first special figure reserved memory number addition designation command for designating (notifying) that the first start winning is generated and the first special figure reserved memory number is increased by one. The command C100 (H) is a second special figure reserved memory number addition designation command for designating (notifying) that the second start winning is generated and the second special figure reserved memory number is increased by one. These commands may be collectively referred to as a special figure reserved memory number addition designation command. The special figure reserved memory number addition designation command is transmitted when a start prize is generated (at the start prize).

  Command C200 (H) is a first special figure reserved memory number subtraction designation command for designating (notifying) that the first special figure reserved memory number decreases by one when the first special figure game is executed. The command C300 (H) is a second special figure reserved memory number subtraction designation command for designating (notifying) that the second special figure reserved memory number is decreased by one when the second special figure game is executed. These commands may be collectively referred to as special figure reserved memory number subtraction designation commands. The special figure reserved memory number subtraction designation command is transmitted when the special figure game is started.

(Special symbol process)
FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). After executing the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning determination process (step S101).

  When the start winning determination process is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the first start port switch 22A is ON (refer to the determination result of the switch process. Hereinafter, the ON determination of various switches). The same applies to (Step S201). If the first start port switch 22A is on (step S201; Yes), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reservation storage number is a predetermined upper limit value (eg, “4”) (step S202). . For example, the CPU 103 uses the first reserved memory number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter (counter for counting the first special figure reserved memory number) provided in the RAM 102 to determine the first special figure reserved memory number. (Hereinafter, the same applies to the first special figure reserved storage number.) When the first special figure reserved memory number is not the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; No), the start port buffer value which is the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the RAM 102 is generated as the first start winning. , “1” is set (step S203).

  When the first start port switch 22A is OFF in step S201 (step S201; No), or when the first special figure reservation storage number reaches the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; Yes), the first It is determined whether or not the 2 start port switch 22B is on (step S204). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (step S204; Yes), it is determined whether or not the second special figure reservation storage number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) ( Step S205). For example, the CPU 103 uses the second reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter (counter that counts the second special figure reserved memory number) provided in the RAM 102 to determine the second special figure reserved memory number. (Hereinafter, the same applies to the second special figure reserved storage number.) When the second special figure reservation storage number is not the upper limit value in step S205 (step S205; No), the start port buffer value is set to “2” as the occurrence of the second start winning (step S206).

  After executing one of the processes in steps S203 and S206, the pending storage number count value corresponding to the start port buffer value is updated to be incremented by 1 (step S207). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the first reserved memory number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the second reserved memory number count value is incremented by one. Thus, when the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the first special figure game is satisfied (when the first start winning is generated), the first special figure is held. When the number of memories increases by 1 and the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the second special game is satisfied (when the second start winning occurs) The number of second special figure reservation storage increases by one. At this time, the total reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter provided in the RAM 102, is updated to add 1 (step S208).

  After executing the process of step S208, the CPU 103 extracts a predetermined game random number corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning (step S209). As an example, in the process of step S209, a special figure display result (from the numerical data updated by a random counter provided in the random number circuit 104 or the RAM 102 (the value is updated by the game random number update process)) ( Random value MR1 (any value from “1” to “65535”) for determination or random value MR2 for determining the big hit type (any value from “1” to “100”) Numerical data indicating the random number MR3 (any one of “1” to “100”) for determining the variation pattern is extracted. Numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way is stored as reserved data by being set at the head of the empty entry in the special figure storage unit (provided in the RAM 102) corresponding to the start port buffer value ( Step S210).

  In the process of step S210, for example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, the hold data is set in the first special figure hold storage unit, while when the start port buffer value is “2”, the hold data is held. Data is set in the second special figure holding storage unit. In this way, the hold data representing the held special figure game is stored in the special figure hold storage unit.

  As shown in FIG. 6 (A), the first special figure holding storage unit associates with the holding numbers “1” to “4” in the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first start winning opening, for example. The numerical data of the random number values MR1 to MR3 is stored as pending data until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). The hold data stored in the first special figure holding storage unit in this way indicates the first special figure game whose execution is put on hold.

  As shown in FIG. 6 (B), for example, the second special figure holding storage unit associates with the holding numbers “1” to “4” in the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second start winning opening. The numerical data of the random number values MR1 to MR3 is stored as pending data until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). The hold data stored in the second special figure holding storage unit in this way indicates the second special figure game whose execution is put on hold.

  In this embodiment, in this way, a special game (notably information relating to the special game) that has not yet been started (execution is suspended) is stored as a reserved memory.

  Returning to FIG. 5, following the process of step S210, a start winning command is executed (step S211). If the starting opening buffer value is “1”, the CPU 103 performs transmission setting of the first starting winning designation command and the first special figure reserved memory number addition designation command as the starting winning command, and the starting opening buffer value is “ If “2”, the second start winning designation command and the second special figure reserved memory number addition designation command are set to be transmitted as the start winning command (step S401).

  Thereafter, the CPU 103 determines whether the start port buffer value is “1” or “2” (step S212). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is “2” (step S212; “2”), the starting port buffer is cleared and its stored value (starting port buffer value) is initialized to “0” ( Step S213), the start winning determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is “1” (step S212; “1”), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to “0” (step S214). The process proceeds to step S204.

  The special symbol normal process of step S110 shown in FIG. 4 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol normal process.

  In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol holding storage number is “0” (step S231). When the second special figure reservation storage number is other than “0” (step S231; No), the randomness stored in the head area (the storage area corresponding to the reservation number “1”) of the second special figure storage part Numerical data of numerical values MR1 to MR3 are read (step S232). Thereby, the game random number extracted corresponding to the occurrence of the second start winning is read. The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation in the RAM 102 and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S232, for example, by subtracting 1 from the second reserved memory number count value, 1 is subtracted from the second special figure reserved memory number, and the stored contents in the second special figure reserved memory unit are shifted (step S232). S233). For example, the second special figure hold storage unit stores the hold data stored in the storage area lower than the hold number “1” (the storage area corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) one entry at a time. shift. In step S233, 1 is subtracted from the total reserved storage number. Then, the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the special fluctuation figure designation buffer provided in the RAM 102, is updated to “2” (step S234).

  When the second special figure reserved memory number is “0” in step S231 (step S231; Yes), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved memory number is “0” (step S235). When the first special figure reservation storage number is other than “0” (step S235; No), the randomness stored in the head area (the storage area corresponding to the reservation number “1”) of the first special figure reservation storage unit The numerical data of the numerical values MR1 to MR3 are read (step S236). Thereby, the game random number extracted corresponding to the occurrence of the first start winning is read. The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation in the RAM 102 and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S236, for example, 1 is subtracted from the first reserved figure number storage value by subtracting 1 from the first reserved memory number count value, and the stored contents in the first special figure reservation storage unit are shifted (step S236). S237). For example, the first special figure hold storage unit stores the hold data stored in the storage area lower than the hold number “1” (the storage area corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) one entry at a time. shift. In the process of step S237, 1 is subtracted from the total reserved storage number. Then, the variable special figure designation buffer value is updated to “1” (step S238). By the above process, the second special figure game is executed with priority over the first special figure game.

  After executing one of the processes in steps S234 and S238, the special symbol display result, which is the special symbol variable display result (variable display result of the special graphic game), is determined as either “big hit” or “lost”. (Step S239). As an example, in the process of step S239, a first special figure display result determination table (see FIG. 8A) prepared in advance in the ROM 101 or a second special figure display result determination table. (Refer to FIG. 8 (B). Reference is made in the probability variation state). Whether or not the state is the probability variation state is specified by, for example, the state of a probability variation flag (a flag that is turned on in the probability variation state) provided in the RAM 102. In each special figure display result determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” or “losing” as the determination result. Just do it. The CPU 103 determines the special figure display result by referring to the special figure display result determination table based on the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result read into the random number buffer for variation (determination that matches the random number value). The determination result assigned to the value is the current determination result (the same applies hereinafter). Note that the CPU 103 determines that the special figure display result is “big hit” at a higher determination rate in the probability variation state than in the case of the probability variation state (see the determination ratio in FIG. 8).

  CPU103 determines whether the special figure display result determined by the process of step S239 is "big hit" (step S240). When the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit” (step S240; Yes), the big hit flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to the on state (step S241).

  Thereafter, the jackpot type is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S242). As an example, in the process of step S242, a jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 9) prepared in advance in the ROM 101 is used. In the jackpot type determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type may be assigned to either of the “non-probable change” and “probability change” jackpot types. . The CPU 103 may determine the jackpot type by referring to the jackpot type determination table based on the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type read into the random number buffer for variation.

  Thereafter, the CPU 103 stores the jackpot type by storing data indicating the determination result of the jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer provided in the RAM 102 (step S243).

  When the special figure display result is not “big hit” in step S240 (step S240; No), after executing the process of step S243, the variable display result (special figure display result) of the special figure game to be executed this time The determined special symbol is determined (step S246). As an example, when the big hit flag is off, a special symbol predetermined as a lost symbol is determined as a confirmed special symbol. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is on, one of the special symbols predetermined as a plurality of types of big hit symbols is determined as the confirmed special symbol in accordance with the big hit type stored in the big hit type buffer.

  After executing the process of step S246, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “1” (step S247), and the special symbol normal process is terminated.

  In step S235, if the number of reserved memories of the first special figure game is “0” (step S235; Yes), after setting the demo (step S248), the special symbol normal process is terminated. In the demo setting, it is determined whether or not a customer waiting demo designation command for designating the display start of the demo screen has been transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (for example, the customer waiting demonstration designation in the RAM 102). A flag that is turned on when the command has already been transmitted is provided, and this determination is made according to the state of this flag). At this time, if it has already been transmitted, the demo setting is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the transmission setting of the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration setting is terminated.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. FIG. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variation pattern setting process.

  In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S261). If the big hit flag is on (step S261; Yes), the fluctuation pattern at the big hit is determined (step S262). On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off (step S261; No), the fluctuation pattern at the time of losing is determined (step S265). The variation pattern is for designating the execution time (special diagram variation time) of the variable display of the special symbol game or the decorative symbol and the variable display pattern of the decorative symbol.

  FIG. 11 shows the variation pattern used in this embodiment. In this embodiment, there are PA1-1, PA2-1, PA3-2 to PA3-8 as fluctuation patterns at the time of loss. Further, there are PB4-2 to PB4-8 as fluctuation patterns at the time of big hit. PA1-1 and PA2-1 specify non-reach. PA2-1 is a pattern for time reduction (with shortening) in which the special figure variation time (execution period of the special figure game) is shorter than normal (PA1-1).

  PA 3-2 to PA 3-4 and PB 3-2 to PB 3-4 are patterns that specify execution of normal reach. PA3-2 and PB3-2 specify the non-execution of the pseudo-series, PA3-3 and PB3-3 specify the execution of the pseudo-series that performs re-variation once, and PA3-4 and PB3-4 It is a pattern that specifies execution of a pseudo-run that performs re-variation twice.

  PA3-5 to PA3-6 and PB3-5 to PB3-6 are patterns for designating the execution of super reach A. PA3-5 and PB3-5 are patterns that specify execution of a pseudo-run that performs re-variation twice, and PA3-6 and PB3-6 are patterns that specify execution of a pseudo-run that performs re-change three times.

  PA3-7 to PA3-8 and PB3-7 to PB3-8 are patterns that specify execution of super reach B. PA3-7 and PB3-7 are patterns for designating execution of a pseudo-series that performs re-variation twice, and PA3-8 and PB3-8 are patterns for designating execution of a pseudo-series that performs re-variation three times.

  In the process of step S262, for example, the big hit variation pattern is determined using the big hit variation pattern determination table prepared in the ROM 101. In the big hit variation pattern determination table, for example, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination is used as a determination result for each variation pattern at the big hit (in order to realize the determination ratio of FIG. PB3-2 to PB3-8) may be allocated. The CPU 103 refers to the big hit variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 read to the random number buffer for variation, and thus the variation pattern at the time of big hit (any of PB3-2 to PB3-8) To decide.

  In the process of step S265, for example, the variation pattern at the time of the loss is determined using the first loss variation pattern determination table or the second loss variation pattern determination table prepared in the ROM 101. The first loss variation pattern determination table is used when not in the time-short state, and the second loss variation pattern determination table is used when in the time-short state. Whether or not the time is short is specified by, for example, the state of a time short flag (a flag that is turned on when the time is short) provided in the RAM 102. In the first loss variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (determined value) compared with the random value MR3 so as to realize the determination ratio of FIG. 13A is a variation pattern (PA1-1) at the time of loss as a determination result. , PA3-2 to PA3-8). In the second loss variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (determined value) compared with the random value MR3 so as to realize the determination ratio of FIG. 13B is a loss variation pattern (PA2-1) as a determination result. , PA3-2 to PA3-8). The CPU 103 refers to the first or second loss variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the variation pattern determination random value MR3 read into the variation random number buffer, thereby causing the variation pattern (PA1- 1, any one of PA3-2 to PA3-4, or any one of PA2-1, PA3-2 to PA3-4) may be determined.

  Referring to the determination ratios in FIG. 12 and FIG. 13, the big hit expectation is high in the order of super reach B> super reach A> normal reach. Also, the greater the number of re-variations in the pseudo-ream, the higher the expectation of jackpot. In particular, when the same reach production is executed, the greater the number of re-variations, the higher the degree of expectation for jackpot. In the time-short state, PA2-1 (see FIG. 13) with a short special figure fluctuation time is selected at the time of loss, so in the time-short state, the average special figure fluctuation time is shorter than in the non-time-short state. .

  After executing one of the processes of steps S262 and S265, a special figure fluctuation time (see FIG. 11) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined this time is set (step S266). For example, a timer initial value corresponding to the special figure variation time is set in a predetermined timer of the RAM 102 (hereinafter, the elapsed time from the start of the special figure game execution is measured by updating the timer value at each timer interruption or the like. Will be.)

  Subsequent to the process of step S266, the special symbol change is started so as to start one of the first special figure game and the second special figure game for which the start condition is satisfied (step S267). ). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “1”, a drive signal for executing the first special symbol game is transmitted to the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “2”, a drive signal for executing the second special symbol game is transmitted to the second special symbol display device 4B.

  After the processing of step S267 is executed, transmission setting of a change start time command (various commands specifying the determination result and the like) is performed as a command at the start of execution of the special figure game (step S271). For example, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 103 sets transmission of a first fluctuation start designation command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, a display result designation command, and a first special figure pending memory number subtraction designation command. I do. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 103 transmits the second fluctuation start designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command, display result designation command, and second special figure pending memory number subtraction designation command. I do.

  After executing the process of step S268, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” (step S269), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

  The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. For example, the CPU 103 determines whether the elapsed time since the start of the special figure game (measured by the predetermined timer or the like) has reached the special figure variation time set above (the predetermined timer value is 0). If it is not reached, a drive signal for executing the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game is supplied to the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The process is terminated after the process of changing the special symbol is performed. On the other hand, when the special symbol variation time is reached, the timing for deriving the variable display result is reached, so a predetermined drive signal is supplied to the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B and determined as described above. Stop and display the symbol of the variable display result this time ("L" is "-", "Probability change" is "7", "Non-probability change" is "3"), and set the symbol confirmation designation command transmission setting. And the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “3”. By executing step S112 repeatedly every time a timer interrupt occurs, the execution of the special game is realized.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. For example, when the variable display result of this time is “big hit” (when the big hit flag is on, etc.), the CPU 103 resets the time reduction flag and the probability variation flag to off. After that, transmission setting of the hit start designation command is performed, the special figure process flag is updated to “4”, and this processing is terminated. In the case of a time reduction state such as “losing” (when the big hit flag is off, etc.), it is determined whether a predetermined number of variable displays that can be executed in the time reduction state has been executed (for example, a time reduction counter (time reduction) provided in the RAM 102). (The counter for counting the remaining number) is decremented by 1 and it is determined whether the value after the decrement is “0”), or when variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (the count value is “0”). ”), The time reduction flag is reset to OFF, the value of the special figure process flag is set to“ 0 ”, and the process is terminated. Even in the case of “losing” and not being in a short time state, when the predetermined number of variable displays has not been executed, the process is terminated by setting the value of the special figure process flag to “0”.

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. For example, an elapsed time (which may be measured by a timer or the like provided in the RAM 102, the same as for other elapsed times) after the transmission setting of the hit start designation command is set in advance as a fanfare waiting time ( It is determined whether or not the waiting time from the start of fanfare to the end in the big hit gaming state has been reached. When the fanfare waiting time is reached, the special prize process flag is updated to “5” by performing a process (opening of a solenoid drive signal) for opening the big prize opening in order to start a round game. By repeating step S114 every time a timer interrupt occurs, waiting until the start timing of the round game (waiting until the end of the fanfare), opening of the big prize opening, and the like are realized.

  The big hit release processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. For example, the CPU 103 determines whether it is time to end the round game. The number of times the count switch 23 is turned on (the number of game balls that have entered the big winning opening) becomes a predetermined value (for example, “9”) (the counter provided in the RAM 102 may be counted), or round games are played. When the elapsed time from the start (after opening the grand prize opening) reaches the upper limit period (for example, 29 seconds) of the round game, and when it is time to end the round game, A process of returning to the closed state and ending the round game (a process of turning off the solenoid 82) is performed. When the finished round game is the last round game (for example, the 15th round) (it may be counted with a counter provided in the RAM 102, etc.), a setting to send a hit end designation command is performed, and a special process Processing to update the flag to “7” (step S603) is performed, and this processing is terminated. When it is not the last round game, the special figure process flag is updated to “6”, and this process is terminated. If the current time is not the timing for ending the round game, the processing is terminated as it is (the processing for maintaining the big prize opening in an open state may be performed). By repeating step S115 every time a timer interrupt occurs, the open state of the big prize opening is maintained until the timing for returning the big prize opening to the closed state, and finally the big prize opening is closed.

  The big hit release post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. For example, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the elapsed time from the end of the round game (after closing the big prize opening) has reached a predetermined closing time (round game interval period). In this case, the closed state is maintained, and the present process ends. When the predetermined closing time is reached, in order to start the round game, a process for opening the special winning opening is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, and this process is terminated.

  Each round game is realized by repeatedly executing S115 and S116 every time a timer interrupt occurs after the big winning opening is opened in step S114.

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In the jackpot ending process, it is determined whether the elapsed time from the end of the last round game has reached the ending waiting time set above, that is, whether the ending waiting time has ended. When the ending waiting time has not ended, since the ending has not ended, the jackpot end processing is ended as it is. When the ending waiting time is finished, the ending is finished. Next, it is determined whether the current big hit type is a probability change (“probability change”). The jackpot type is stored in the jackpot type buffer. When the big hit type is “probability change”, the probability change flag is set to ON. Regardless of the jackpot type, a predetermined time reduction number is set as an initial value (initial value of the remaining time reduction number, for example, 100) in the time reduction counter, and the time reduction flag is turned on. Thereafter, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0” (step S616), and this process ends.

  In the above series of processing, when the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, one variable display or the like has ended, so the game control process timer, the jackpot type buffer setting value, Various data such as the state of various flags (those that you do not want to carry over to the next variable display) may be reset as appropriate.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
The effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12 executes a predetermined effect control main process after activation. When the effect control CPU 120 receives an effect control command from a predetermined input port of the I / O 125 separately from the effect control main process, the effect control command provided in, for example, the RAM 122 as the received command. Store in receive buffer. In the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined initialization process. Thereafter, the production control CPU 120 generates a timer interrupt by an interrupt request signal from a CTC (counter / timer circuit) (not shown) supplied every predetermined period (for example, 10 milliseconds) (at an interrupt request signal supply interval). A command analysis process, a demonstration display process, an effect control process process, an effect random number process, and the like are executed every predetermined time (2 ms).

  The command analysis process is a process of reading and analyzing the received command stored in the effect control command reception buffer and performing setting corresponding to the analysis result. In the demo display process, when the command analyzed in the command analysis process is a customer-waiting demo designation command, the start setting of the effect to start the display of the demo screen (details of the start setting will be described later) is made for each timer interrupt. Then, the presentation operation control for displaying the start-set demonstration screen (the contents of the presentation operation control will be described later) is performed. The effect control process is a process of executing an effect according to the effect control command. The effect random number update process is a process of updating the effect random number value used for effect control by software.

(About the execution of production)
In the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 120 performs start setting for starting execution of various effects (effect start setting), effect operation control for executing the start-set effect, and the like. Each flag, each timer, each counter, and the like are provided in the RAM 122 (the same applies to other processes).

  The production start setting is, for example, by setting a production control pattern for execution of production (variable display of decorative symbols, race production, single announcement, demonstration screen display, etc.) as a use pattern in the RAM 122 and the set production. Including setting an initial value corresponding to the control pattern in the process timer. After the initial value is set, the timer value of the process timer is subtracted at a predetermined timing (when executing a command analysis process, when performing an effect operation control, etc.) each time a timer interrupt occurs (thereby executing with an effect control pattern) Can specify the elapsed time of the production to be performed). The effect control pattern is a collection of data for executing various effects (including variable display of decorative symbols) and is associated with a process timer determination value to be compared with a timer value of a process timer and the determination value. It is composed of process data including the produced production control execution data (display control data, audio control data, lighting control data, etc.) and an end code. Data constituting the effect control pattern is stored in the ROM 121.

  The effect operation control is a control for executing an effect based on the effect control pattern set in the effect start setting. For example, among the presentation control execution data corresponding to the process timer determination value that matches the current timer value of the process timer, a display control command according to the display control data is transmitted to the display control unit 123 to the image display device 5. An image is displayed, a sound effect signal according to the sound control data is transmitted to the sound control board 13 and sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or an illumination signal according to the lighting control data is sent to the lamp control board 14. Transmission is performed to turn on / off the game effect lamp 9 to perform various effects. Execution of various effects defined by the effect control pattern is realized by repeatedly performing the effect operation control every time the timer interruption occurs.

(Command analysis processing)
In the command analysis process, the reception command (the effect control command received by the effect control board 12) stored in the effect control command reception buffer is analyzed (for example, the MODE data is confirmed), and which effect control the received command is. Whether the command is specified or not is processed according to the specified effect control command. When there are a plurality of received commands, command analysis processing is performed for each command.

  FIG. 14 shows the relationship between the effect control command specified by the analysis by the command analysis process and the processing content performed in the command analysis process corresponding to the effect control command. Each flag and each storage area in the drawing are provided in the RAM 122. Further, “setting” for a flag means turning the flag on. Note that the state of each flag and the command stored in each storage area are reset or deleted at an appropriate timing.

  Further, upon reception of the first special figure reserved memory count addition designation command, a process for newly displaying the first reserved display image in the display area 5H (for example, a process for controlling the image display device 5 via the display control unit 123). The same applies to the display control for the hold display image). When the second special figure reserved memory number addition designation command is received, a process for newly displaying the second reserved display image in the display area 5H is performed. As a result, the first hold display image is incremented by one in response to the first special figure game being newly held based on the occurrence of the first start winning. Also, the second hold display image is incremented by one in response to the second special figure game being newly held based on the occurrence of the second start winning.

  Further, when the first special figure reserved memory number subtraction designation command is received, the rightmost image of the first reserved display images displayed in the display area 5H is erased, and the remaining first reserved display images are moved to the right. The process to shift to is performed. When the second special figure reserved memory number subtraction designation command is received, the leftmost image of the second reserved display images displayed in the display area 5H is erased, and the remaining second reserved display images are shifted to the left. To perform the process. As a result, the first hold display image is reduced by one in response to the new execution of the first special figure game. In response to the new execution of the second special figure game, the second hold display image is reduced by one.

(Production control process)
FIG. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 performs any one of steps S170 to S175 according to the value of the effect process flag.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is executed when the effect process flag is “0”. In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 specifies a change start command (first or second change start designation command, change pattern designation command, display result designation command, first or second special figure reserved memory number subtraction designation. Command) is received. If no change start command is received, this process ends. If there is a change start command received, the decorative symbol variable display starts in synchronization with the start of the special figure game. Therefore, the effect process flag is updated to “1” and the variable display start waiting process ends. To do.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 in the effect control process is a process for starting variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization with the special figure game to be executed in the future, and the effect process flag is “1”. Executed when. FIG. 16 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variable display start setting process.

  In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines a final stop symbol or the like to be a finalized symbol as a variable symbol display result (step S501). For example, the effect control CPU 120 stores the display result designation command (stored in the display result designation command storage area) and the variation pattern designation command (stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area) transmitted from the main board 11. The final stop symbol is determined based on the current variable display result and the current fluctuation pattern indicated by. The final stop symbol may be determined in advance according to the variable display result designated by the display result designation command or the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command. Note that the fixed decorative symbol may be determined randomly from predetermined fixed decorative symbol candidates (candidates corresponding to variable display results).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute one notification (step S502). As an example, the CPU 120 for effect control includes a one-notification execution determination table A (referred to when the current variable display result is “big hit”) and a one-notification execution determination table B (currently prepared). Reference is made when the variable display result is “out of place”), and whether or not one notification is executed is determined. In the single announcement execution determination tables A and B, the effect random number among the effect random numbers updated by a random counter provided in the random number circuit 124 or the RAM 122 (the value is updated by the effect random number update process). The numerical value (decision value) to be compared with SR1 only needs to be assigned to “with execution” or “without execution” as the determination result (the determination value in the table A indicates the determination ratio at the time of jackpot in FIG. The decision values in Table B are assigned so as to realize the decision ratio at the time of losing in FIG. 17). The CPU 103 extracts the production random number SR1, and refers to the one announcement execution determination table A or B according to the current variable display result based on the extracted production random number SR1, thereby executing the one announcement. Presence / absence is determined (the determination result assigned to the determination value that matches the random number is the current determination result, and so on). As shown in FIG. 17, in this embodiment, when the current variable display result is “lost”, one notification is always “not executed”. Therefore, when one notification is executed, “big hit” is confirmed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the current variation pattern is one that designates execution of a pseudo-continuity (PA3-3 to PA3-8, or PB3-3 to PB3-8) (step). S503) If the execution of the pseudo-run is specified (step S503; Yes), whether or not the race effect is executed is determined (step S504). As an example, the CPU 120 for effect control refers to a race effect execution determination table prepared in advance in the ROM 121 and determines whether or not to execute a race effect. In the race effect execution determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the effect random number SR2 among the effect random numbers may be assigned to “executed” or “not executed” as the determination result ( For the determination ratio, see the determination example in FIG. The CPU 103 extracts the effect random number SR2, and determines whether or not to execute the race effect by referring to the race effect execution determination table based on the extracted effect random number SR2. The race effect is executed at the time of the pseudo-continuous execution (step S503), and is executed with a probability of 1/2 regardless of the current variable display result (see FIG. 18).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined to execute the race effect in step S504 (step S505). If it is determined to execute (step S505; Yes), the effect pattern (effect mode) of the race effect is determined. ) Is determined according to the fluctuation pattern and the presence / absence of one notification (step S506).

  Here, the race production will be described. As described above, the race effect is an effect in which two runners race (FIGS. 24 and 25). In this embodiment, each runner is distinguished by its color. Each runner has a jackpot expectation. There are blue, green, red, and rainbow colors for each runner, and the big hit expectation is high in the order of rainbow> red> green> blue (FIG. 19). The jackpot expectation degree of the character that won the race effect (the last race effect when a plurality of race effects are performed) is notified as a variable display of the decorative pattern being executed and the jackpot expectation degree of the special game. Note that green and blue runners with relatively low jackpot expectations belong to the first group, and rainbow and red runners with relatively high jackpot expectation belong to the second group. As described above, the race effect is executed at the time of executing the pseudo-continuous, and is executed once or twice according to the number of re-variations in the pseudo-continuous (FIG. 23). When the re-variation is one time, the race effect is executed after the start of the first re-variation and is executed before the execution timing of one notification (executed at a predetermined timing before the reach is established). (FIG. 23A). When the re-variation is two to three times, the race effect is executed at each of the first timing and the subsequent second timing (FIGS. 23B and 23C). When the re-variation is twice, the first timing arrives at the first re-variation, and the second timing arrives at the second re-variation. When the re-variation is three times, the first timing arrives at the second re-variation, and the second timing arrives at the third re-variation. The second timing comes after the execution timing of the one-shot notice and before the reach establishment, regardless of whether the re-variation is twice or three times.

  The production pattern of the race production and the determination ratio thereof are shown in FIGS. FIG. 20 is an example of determining the effect pattern when the re-variation of the pseudo-series is once (the selected effect is executed once). FIG. 21 is an example of determining the effect pattern when the re-variation of the pseudo-continuous is 2 or 3 times (the selection effect is executed twice at the first timing and the second timing). The performance pattern designates the color of the runner who races and which runner wins (including that both runners stop the race) for each race performance (in FIG. 21, two times). Designation pattern of the race production of).

  20 and 21, the color on the left side of the arrow is the color of the two runners who are racing, and the color on the right side of the arrow is the color of the runner who wins the race. The “x” on the right side of the arrow indicates that both runners will stop the race in the race. For example, “red × rainbow → red” indicates an effect pattern in which a red runner and a rainbow runner race and the red runner wins (the red jackpot expectation is notified). “Red × rainbow → ×” indicates a production pattern in which a red runner and a rainbow runner race, but both runners stop the race.

  In step S506, the effect control CPU 120 refers to any of the race effect pattern determination tables A to E prepared in advance in the ROM 121, and determines the effect pattern of the race effect. The race effect pattern determination table A is referred to when the current variable display result is “big hit” and the current variation pattern is to execute one re-variation pseudo-continuation. The race effect pattern determination table B is referred to when the current variable display result is “losing” and the current variation pattern is to execute one re-variation pseudo-continuation. The race effect pattern determination table C is referred to when the variable display result of this time is “big hit”, and the fluctuation pattern of this time executes a quasi-continuation of re-variation 2 to 3 times, and there is no execution of one notification. The The race effect pattern determination table D is referred to when the current variable display result is “losing”, and the current fluctuation pattern is a re-variation 2 to 3 pseudo-runs, and there is no execution of one notification. The The race effect pattern determination table E is a table where the variable display result of this time is “big hit”, and the fluctuation pattern of this time is executed 2 to 3 times of re-variation, and one announcement is executed. The

  In the race effect pattern determination tables A to E, for example, if a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the effect random number SR3 among the effect random numbers is assigned to each pattern of the race effect that is the determination result. Good. The decision values of the table A are assigned so as to realize the decision ratio at the time of big hit in FIG. 20, and the decision values of the table B are assigned so as to realize the decision ratio at the time of loss in FIG. The decision value of C is assigned so as to realize the decision ratio at the time of big hit in FIG. 21A, and the decision value of the table D is assigned so as to realize the decision ratio at the time of loss in FIG. The decision values in the table E are assigned so as to realize the decision ratio at the time of big hit in FIG.

  In step S506, the CPU 103 extracts the effect random number SR3, and refers to any one of the race effect pattern determination tables A to E according to the current variable display result based on the extracted effect random number SR3. The race production pattern is determined.

  As shown in FIG. 20, the magnitude relationship of the determination ratio of the production pattern determined when the variable display result is “big hit” is as follows: Rainbow runner win pattern (SE06)> Red runner win pattern (SE05)> Green runner win pattern (SE03)> Blue runner win pattern (SE02)> Both runners stop the race (SE01, SE04 (total decision ratio)) The magnitude relationship is reversed. Further, in FIG. 21, the color of the runner who wins at the second timing and the determination ratio when both runners stop the race (the total value when there are multiple patterns where the same color wins or the race is stopped) The relationship is the same as in FIG. Due to such a relationship, the expected degree of jackpot is larger in the order of rainbow> red> green> blue. Also, the expectation of jackpot when both runners stop the race is lower than blue and lower when one runner wins (lower than when any color runner wins). That is, when both runners stop the race, it is notified that the big hit expectation is lower than when the runner wins. In SE01 and SE04, SE04 has a higher expectation degree of jackpot.

  Further, in this embodiment, when at least one of the blue runner and the green runner belonging to the first group with a relatively low expectation degree of jackpot races, the ratio of both runners stopping the race (hereinafter, Red runners and rainbow runners belonging to the second group, which have a relatively high expectation of jackpot than the first stop rate, race (that is, no blue or green runners belonging to the first group appear) In the case of a pattern), the rate at which both runners cancel the race (hereinafter referred to as the second cancellation rate) is higher. Here, in this embodiment, the rate at which the variable display result is a big hit is about 1/34 even at the time of probability change (FIG. 8), and it becomes a big hit with three re-variation pseudo-runs with the highest degree of big hit expectation. The ratio is (1/34) × {(24 + 30) / 100} (see FIG. 12) = (54/3400). On the other hand, the ratio of loss in the three re-variation pseudo-runs with the highest expectation level for jackpot is (33/34) × {(5 + 2) / 100} (refer to the non-short time in FIG. 13A) = (231 / 3400). For this reason, the determination ratio of the production pattern in this embodiment is dominant even in the case of the pseudo-ream with 3 re-variations (the lower the big hit expectation, the re-variation 1-2 times) Then, the decision rate in losing is dominant.) In FIG. 20, the first cancellation ratio at the time of losing (the determination ratio of SE01 / the total of the determination ratios of SE01 to SE03) is 25 / (25 + 20 + 10) = 25/55 (the denominator 100 is common, and is omitted below). The second cancellation ratio (the determination ratio of SE04 / the total of the determination ratios of SE04 to SE06) is 40 / (40 + 4 + 1) = 40/45, and the second cancellation ratio is higher. In addition, the first cancellation ratio (total of the determination ratios of SE11 to SE12 / (total of the determination ratios of SE11 to SE16) when the race effect is lost at the first timing in FIG. 21A is (11 + 2) / (11 + 2 + 11 + 2 + 10 + 2). ) = 13/38, and the second cancellation ratio (the total of the determination ratios of SE17 to SE18 / (the total of the determination ratios of SE17 to SE19) is (59 + 2) / (59 + 2 + 1) = 61/62, Similarly, the first stop ratio at the time of the race effect loss at the first timing in FIG.21 (A) is 0/38, and the second stop ratio is 59/62. As can be seen from this relationship, in this embodiment, the second cancellation ratio is higher than the first cancellation ratio.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the race performance is executed twice, when the red runner belonging to the second group and the rainbow runner race (when the runner belonging to the first group does not appear), Depending on the execution timing of the race performance, the rate of winning one of the runners (the rate of stopping the race) is different (here, the one with the slower execution timing (the second timing) The winning percentage is high). The ratio of the red or rainbow runner winning at the first timing at the time of the big hit in FIG. 21A (the determination ratio of SE19 / the total of the determination ratios of SE17 to SE19) is 48 / (1 + 12 + 48) = 48/61. However, the rate at which the red or rainbow runner wins at the second timing at the time of the big hit in FIG. 21A (the sum of the decision rates of SE18 to SE19 / the sum of the decision rates of SE17 to SE19) is (12 + 48) / ( 1 + 12 + 48) = 60/61. Such a relationship is the same in the case of loss in FIG. 21A and in the case of FIG. Therefore, the above can be said.

  Further, in this embodiment, when one notification is executed, a race effect in which a red runner and a rainbow runner belonging to the second group race at the second timing is performed. The rate of winning of the runners of the red or rainbow is higher than the rate of winning of the runners of the red or rainbow in the race production in which the red runners and the rainbow runners belonging to the second group race when one notification is not executed. Since the single notification is executed when the variable display result is “big hit”, when the single notification is executed, the race effect at the time of losing is not executed (FIG. 21B )). At the time of a loss when one notification is not executed, the determination rate of SE17 in which both the red and rainbow runners stop the race at the second timing is higher than when the red or rainbow runner wins (FIG. 21 ( A)) When one notification is executed, since there is no losing, the determination rate of the SE 17 decreases (FIG. 21B). Moreover, the percentage of red or rainbow runners winning at the time of the big hit does not change depending on whether or not there is one notification. Therefore, the above can be said. In FIG. 21 (B), the determination rate of SE17 is set to “0/100”, and at the second timing after one notification is executed, both the red and rainbow runners are prevented from stopping the race. Either runner may always win in the race production where the red runner and the rainbow runner race.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21, in each effect pattern in which the race effect is executed twice, the runner expectation degree (color) of the runner appearing in the race effect is the first timing and the second timing. The second timing is higher or the second timing is higher (runners with colors that are less likely to hit the jackpot than the runners that appeared at the first timing do not appear in the race performance at the second timing). In addition, the jackpot expectation level notified by the race performance (the jackpot expectation level corresponding to the color of the runner who wins the race performance, or the jackpot expectation level when both runners stop the race) is also the first timing and the second timing. Or the second timing is higher (not lower).

  In addition, you may change suitably the content and determination ratio of the production pattern in FIG.20 and FIG.21 so that at least 1 of the said conditions may be satisfy | filled.

  After step S506, when there is no pseudo-continuation (step S503; No), when there is no execution of the race effect (step S505; No), the above determination result, the current variation pattern, the current variable display result, etc. (Step S507). The start setting of the effect reflecting the above is performed (the above-described setting of the effect control pattern, the setting of the timer initial value corresponding to the special figure change time specified by the change pattern, etc.). Here, the first effect operation control may also be performed. Thereafter, the effect process flag is updated to “2” (step S508), and this process ends.

  The variable display effect processing in step S172 in the effect control process of FIG. 15 is executed when the effect process flag is “2”. FIG. 22 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variable display effect process.

  In the variable display effect process, first, it is determined whether or not the variable display time (special drawing fluctuation time) corresponding to the current fluctuation pattern has elapsed (step S521). As an example, the timer value of the process timer is updated (for example, 1 is subtracted) (may be updated at another timing that arrives once per timer interrupt, such as at the beginning of the effect control process). When the end code is read from the effect control pattern corresponding to the timer value, it is determined that the variable display time has elapsed.

  If the variable display time has not elapsed (step S521; No), it is determined whether or not the present is an execution period for executing one notification (step S522). The said period should just be predetermined, for example in the set production | presentation control pattern (For example, the said period is specified by the comparison with the timer value of the said process timer, and the production | presentation control pattern. Hereinafter, it is the same also about other periods. ). During the execution period (step S522; Yes), presentation operation control for executing one notification is performed (step S523).

  After step S523, when it is not the execution period of one notification (step S522; No), it is determined whether the current period is the execution period of the race effect (step S524). The said period should just be predetermined in the production | presentation control pattern set, for example. When it is determined that it is the execution period (step S524; Yes), effect operation control for executing the race effect is performed (step S525).

  After step S525, when the current time is not the execution period of the race effect (step S524; No), other effects during the variable display such as the variable display of the decorative symbols and the reach effect (when executed) are executed. The effect operation control is performed (step S526), and the variable display effect process is terminated.

  If the variable display time has elapsed (step S521; Yes), it is determined whether or not a symbol confirmation designation command has been received (step S530). At this time, if the symbol confirmation designation command is not received (step S530; No), the variable display effect process is terminated.

  When the symbol confirmation designation command is received (step S530; Yes), display control for deriving and displaying the final stop symbol (definite ornament symbol) that is the display result in the variable symbol variable display is performed (step S531).

  Thereafter, a predetermined time is set as a hit start designation command reception waiting time (step S539). Further, after the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3” (step S540), the effect process during variable display is ended.

  The special figure waiting process in step S173 of FIG. 15 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. The production control CPU 120 does not reach the preset start start command reception waiting time, since the current elapsed time after the last stop symbol is derived and displayed (it should be measured with a predetermined timer), In addition, when the hit start designation command is received, the start setting of the big hit effect (the effect from the start of the fanfare executed before the big hit game state to the ending) is performed. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4”, and this process is terminated. If the hit start designation command reception waiting time has not been reached and no hit start designation command has been received, this processing is terminated. When the current elapsed time has reached the start designation command reception waiting time, the variable display result of the special figure game is determined to be “lost”, the value of the production process flag is updated to “0”, and this process is performed. finish.

  The hitting process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. For example, the effect control CPU 120 performs effect operation control for executing an effect during the big hit. And when the winning end designation command is received, each round game has been completed, so the start setting of the ending effect is made, and the production of the character so that my character appears in the ending effect Start setting may be performed. The value of the production process flag is updated to “5” and the hitting process is terminated. If the winning end designation command has not been received, since all the round games have not ended, this processing is ended as it is.

  The ending process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”, and is a process for executing the ending at the end of the big hit gaming state. The effect control CPU 120 determines whether the current timing is the end timing of the ending. The end timing may be determined by the effect control pattern. If it is not the end timing, the ending effect operation control is performed, and this processing is ended. When the current timing is the end timing (for example, when the end code is read), this processing is ended.

(Each execution timing)
When the re-variation is performed once, the effects are executed in the order of re-variation start → race effect → one-shot notice → reach establishment (FIG. 23A). When re-variation is performed twice, the first re-variation start → race production (first timing) → first notice → second re-change start → race production (second timing) → reach establishment The effects are executed in order (FIG. 23B). When re-variation is performed three times, the second re-variation start → race production (first timing) → first notice → third re-change start → race production (second timing) → reach establishment The effects are executed in order (FIG. 23C).

(Example of production screen for race production)
In the case of a race production where a red runner and a rainbow runner race (SE05, SE06, etc.), first, a red runner and a rainbow runner compete (FIG. 24 (A)), and red wins (SE05, etc.) ) Is informed that the red runner has reached the goal ahead of the rainbow runner (FIG. 24B) and the red runner has won (high expectation of jackpot) (FIG. 24). (C)). If the rainbow wins (SE06, etc.), the rainbow runner won the goal ahead of the red runner (Fig. 24D), and the rainbow runner won (the highest expectation of jackpot) ) Is notified (FIG. 24E). When both runners stop the race (SE04, etc.), first, as in the case of FIG. 24, the red runner and the rainbow runner compete (FIG. 25 (A)), and then the cliff A appears. (FIG. 25 (B)), both runners fall to the cliff A and stop the race (FIG. 25 (C)). It is notified that the expected degree of jackpot is low due to such a race cancellation.

(effect)
In this embodiment, as described above, the ratio of both runners stopping the race in the race production in which at least one of the blue runner and the green runner belonging to the first group with a relatively low expectation of jackpot appears ( Race production in which red runners and rainbow runners belonging to the second group appear relatively higher than the first cancellation ratio) (that is, races in which blue and green runners belonging to the first group do not appear) The ratio at which both runners cancel the race (second cancellation ratio) is higher in the production) (see FIGS. 20 and 21). Thereby, even when the big hit expectation is low, it is possible to execute the race effect in which the red runner and the rainbow runner appear, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In particular, as in the above embodiment, since the ratio of “losing” is usually higher than the ratio of “big hit” as the variable display result, a race in which red runners and rainbow runners appear due to the above configuration. The appearance rate of the production can be increased, and the player expects that the big hit expectation is high every time the race production where the red runner and the rainbow runner appear is executed, so the production effect is enhanced. Can do. When a selection effect such as a race effect (as described above, a race effect is a type of selection effect) is executed, conventionally, an option is not selected from the presented options (runner color). On the other hand, there was a performance of high expectation level (high expectation) that was not usually selected. However, since the variable display result is rarely “big hit” as described above, the player rarely touches the highly expected performance, and the performance effect is not enhanced. In the embodiment described above, an effect (a red runner and a rainbow that suggests high expectation) is obtained from the race effect (the effect including an aspect in which both runners cancel) and the relationship between the first cancel rate and the second cancel rate. The race effect with the runners in the game is easy to be executed, so the production effect is enhanced.

  As described above, in FIG. 20, in SE01 and SE04 in which both runners stop the race, SE04 has a higher expectation degree for big hit. In this way, even when both runners stop the race, when the runner belonging to the first group shows the jackpot expectation degree when the runner belonging to the second group appears (particularly, It should be higher than (if only runners belonging to the first group appear). As a result, even if both runners stop the race, when runners belonging to the second group appear, they can have a big hit expectation and pay attention to the runners appearing in the race production. As a result, the production effect increases.

  Further, as in the above embodiment, the determination rate of the pattern in which the red runner and the rainbow runner appear and both stop the race (the production in which the runner of the color belonging to the first group does not appear) is blue or By making it higher than the determination ratio of the pattern in which at least one of the green runners appears and both of them stop the race (the production where the runner of the color belonging to the first group appears) (see FIGS. 20 and 21), The execution ratio of the race production in which the red runner and the rainbow runner appear can be increased, and the production effect can be enhanced.

  In this embodiment, as described above, when the race effect is executed twice, when the red runner and the rainbow runner belonging to the second group race (the runner belonging to the first group is When it does not appear), the rate at which one of the runners wins (the rate at which the race is stopped) differs depending on the execution timing of the race effect (see FIGS. 20 and 21), so the player pays attention to each race effect. And the production effect is improved. In particular, in this embodiment, the one with the later execution timing (the second timing) has a higher rate of winning one of the runners, so even if the expectation reported in the first race effect is poor, the race effect The player expects to be executed again, and the production effect is improved.

  In the above-described embodiment, as described above, when one notification is executed, a race effect in which a red runner and a rainbow runner belonging to the second group race at the second timing is performed. The percentage of red or rainbow runners winning in the event of a break is determined by the red or rainbow in the case where a race performance in which a red runner belonging to the second group and a rainbow runner race is performed when one notification is not executed. It is higher than the rate of winning runners (see FIGS. 20 and 21). This makes it difficult for both the red runner and the rainbow runner to stop the race when the high-expected one-shot notice is executed, making it difficult for both parties to cancel the race. The production effect can be enhanced (decrease in game entertainment can be suppressed).

  Also, in this embodiment, as described above, the big hit expectation when both runners stop the race in the race production is lower than blue and lower than when one runner wins (which color runner Is lower than when winning (see FIGS. 20 and 21). That is, when both runners stop the race, it is notified that the big hit expectation is lower than when the runner wins. Thereby, the player pays attention to which one of the runners wins in the race production, and the production effect is improved.

  Further, in this embodiment, as described above, in each effect pattern in which the race effect is executed twice, the runner expectation degree (color) of the runner appearing in the race effect is the same at the first timing and the second timing. Alternatively, the second timing is higher (runners with a color that is less likely to be a big hit than the runners that appeared at the first timing do not appear in the race performance at the second timing) (see FIG. 21). In addition, the jackpot expectation level notified by the race performance (the jackpot expectation level corresponding to the color of the runner who wins the race performance, or the jackpot expectation level when both runners stop the race) is also the first timing and the second timing. Or the second timing is higher (not lower). As a result, even if the expectation level for jackpots reported in the first race effect is low, the expectation can be expected for the second race effect, or when the expectation level for jackpots reported in the first race effect is high. The expectation degree of jackpot that is notified in the second race production can be further increased, and the production effect is improved.

(Modification)
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment and the like, and various modifications and applications can be made to the above embodiment and the like. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to include all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and the part described in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may be provided with the following structure. Although the modification of the said embodiment is illustrated below, at least one part of each modification can be combined unless a contradiction arises.

(Modification 1)
The effect control CPU 120 may perform the following effects. The effect control CPU 120 is similar to the case described in the above embodiment, based on the variable display result specified by the display result specifying command, the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command, the effect random number, the table, etc. The presence / absence of execution, the execution mode, etc. may be determined, the start of the production may be set, and the production operation may be controlled to execute the production.

  For example, the effect control CPU 120 performs an effect of displaying the meter M of FIG. 26 on the image display device 5. The meter M consists of four white squares. In the meter M, one square is painted black every time one point is accumulated. Thereby, the display mode of the meter M changes stepwise. It is informed that the more points accumulated in the meter M, the higher the degree of expectation of the variable display that is being executed is higher (the effect control CPU 120 makes it easier to accumulate more points at the time of the big hit. Aspect etc. are determined). In other words, the meter M changes according to the expectation level for jackpot. A specific effect such as super reach may be executed when the meter M is full (when all of the squares are filled in black) (this also informs that the expectation level for the big hit is high). As a result, the meter M changes according to the expectation degree of jackpot).

  In addition, the effect control CPU 120 executes a point giving effect. The said effect is an effect which applies arrow P2 to target P1, for example like FIG. 26 (FIG. 26 (A)). When the target P1 hits the arrow P2 (success), 1 point is given to the meter M (the points accumulated in the meter M are increased by 1 point). When the target P1 hits the arrow P2, first, the fact that 1 point is given to the meter M is informed by the indication “Accurate! + 1Pt” (FIG. 26B), and the meter M actually 1 point is given (one square is painted black and 1 point is accumulated, between FIGS. 26C to 26D). When the arrow P2 does not hit the target P1 (in the case of failure), the meter M does not change (the point is not accumulated. FIG. 26 (G)).

  In addition, the effect control CPU 120 executes a pseudo-joint effect for determining whether or not pseudo-continuation (re-variation) is performed, for example, immediately before a temporary stop when performing re-variation. FIG. 26 (C), (D)). For example, the pseudo-continuous production displays the card G, displays “pseudo-continuous?”, Turns the card G at the end of the production, and displays the contents written on the card G. This is an effect of notifying whether or not (revariation) is executed. The card G and “Is it a quasi-ream?” Tells whether or not a quasi-ream will occur, and notifies the presence / absence of the quasi-ream as a result of the production. In FIG. 26 (D), since the card G turned over has a description of “pseudo ream”, it is informed that a pseudo ream will be executed, and after the notification, the decorative symbol is “3 re 4” (“re re”). Is a temporary stop-dedicated symbol) (FIG. 26 (E). The temporary stop may be a predetermined chance), and then re-variation is performed (FIG. 26 (F)). . The effect of displaying the card G and “Is it a pseudo-ream?” In the pseudo-continuous production is called an introduction effect, and the effect of turning the card G is called a result notification effect. Of the result notification effects, an effect in which nothing is written on the flipped card G (an effect for notifying that the pseudo-ream is not executed) is referred to as a failure effect, and the word “pseudo-ream” is written on the turned card G. A certain effect (the effect of notifying that a pseudo-run is executed) is called a successful effect. Further, the pseudo-joint effect where the failure effect is performed is referred to as a pseudo-joint effect (failure), and the pseudo-joint effect where the success effect is performed is also referred to as a pseudo-joint effect (success).

  The above effect is executed, for example, in units of one variable display of decorative symbols. Specifically, when one variable display is completed, the points accumulated in the meter M are reset.

  When the above-mentioned effect is executed, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the fact that 1 point is given to the meter M (the display mode of the meter M changes) by the point giving effect (“Accuracy! + 1Pt”). ), The execution of the pseudo-joint effect (failure) is restricted (FIGS. 26 and 27).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 27A, after notifying that 1 point is given, the timing when 1 point is actually given to the meter M (one square is newly painted black and 1 point is accumulated) In the period up to (timing) (the other production execution restriction period), the execution of the pseudo-continuous production (failure) is restricted. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 27B, a period from notification that 1 point is given to the end of variable display of a decorative symbol being executed (variable display result is derived) (other effect execution restriction period) The execution of the pseudo-joint effect (failure) is limited. Note that the execution of the pseudo-joint effect (success) is not limited in the other effect execution restriction period. The period of the other effect execution restriction period is arbitrary, and may be an arbitrary timing after the timing at which one point is actually given to the meter M and before the end of variable display of the decorative pattern being executed. Further, when the point giving effect is a failure effect (when the target P1 does not hit the arrow P2), execution of the pseudo-joint effect is prohibited regardless of whether the result notification effect is a success effect or a failure effect. (In particular, the execution of pseudo-continuous production (failure) is not prohibited). In the example of FIG. 26, the timing at which the execution of the pseudo-joint effect is started is “until the hit! + 1Pt” (FIG. 26B), and until one point is actually given to the meter M. Between. The timing at which one point is actually given to the meter M may be a timing before or after the example of FIG. 26. For example, an arbitrary timing (pseudo) during the period of FIGS. For example, after the execution of the rendition effect has ended. The timing at which 1 point is actually given to the meter M may arrive immediately after notifying that 1 point will be given, or before the timing at which execution of the pseudo-joint effect starts. (The other effect execution restriction period may include a period after the end of the pseudo-joint effect).

  For example, in the variable display start setting process in step S171, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the point giving effect or whether or not to execute the pseudo-joint effect, but decides to execute the successful point giving effect. In addition, if it is determined that the pseudo-joint effect (failure) is to be executed within the other effect execution restriction period, the execution of either the point granting effect or the pseudo-joint effect is canceled (be sure to cancel Or cancel at a certain rate). Alternatively, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution pattern of the point giving effect and the pseudo-jointing effect from the predetermined patterns in the variable display start setting process of step S171, and the predetermined pattern In which there is no pattern that executes a successful point giving effect and executes a pseudo-joint effect (failure) within the other effect execution restriction period (or other pattern determination ratios, etc. (E.g., lower than the determination rate of the pattern or the like for executing the pseudo-continuous production (success) within the production execution restriction period).

  If no other performance execution restriction period is provided, the pseudo-joint production (failure) may be executed indefinitely after the meter M is informed that 1 point is given. In such a case, The player is discouraged due to the execution of the failure effect, or the player frequently has the impression that the difference between the one-point grant and the failure effect is inconsistent, and the interest of the game is reduced. In this modification, the other production execution restriction period is provided and execution of the pseudo-joint production (failure) is restricted, so that the above inconvenience can be solved and a decrease in the interest of the game can be prevented. “Restriction” includes prohibition. In the case of prohibition, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

(Modification 2)
The race effect may be executable even at times other than the pseudo-ream. In addition, the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the race effect may be varied depending on the variable display result, whether the variation pattern is the reach effect, the type of super reach, or the like (the race effect is executed). The player may have a big hit expectation degree, for example, when the race effect is executed, the big hit expectation degree is higher than when not executed). In addition, the number of executions of the race effect may be increased according to the number of times of re-variation of the pseudo-ream, for example. For example, if the re-variation is 1 time, the race effect is executed once, if the re-variation is 2 times, every time the re-variation is executed, the race effect is executed 2 times in total, and if the re-variation is 3 times, the re-variation is executed. Each time, the race performance is executed a total of 3 times. Further, for example, the race effect may be executed before the re-change, and then the race effect may be executed once or multiple times for each re-change. The race effect may be executed regardless of the progress of the pseudo-ream.

(Modification 3)
As a method of determining the pattern of the race performance, for example, the final mode (the color of the runner who wins in the last race performance or whether both runners stop the race) satisfies the above jackpot expectation relationship, For example, a race production pattern (which color runner is selected so as to satisfy at least one of the above-described conditions mentioned in the description of FIGS. 20 and 21). Or the like may be determined. For example, according to each of the above-described final modes, a pattern of a race effect (when a race effect is executed a plurality of times, a pattern of each effect (a result such as which wins other than the last race effect is included) is also included. )) Is prepared in advance, and according to the determined final target, the pattern of the race effect is determined by lottery (such as determining using a table and a random number for performance as described above).

  The number of race effects may be determined based on a lottery or a variation pattern, and the effect pattern of each race effect may be determined individually by lottery. For example, the effect pattern of each race effect may be determined as in the determination example of FIG. 20 (similar to the above, determined by lottery using the effect random number and the table). In addition, you may change the determination ratio of the production pattern and production pattern which can be determined by each race production so that the said conditions mentioned by description of FIG.20 and FIG.21 may be satisfy | filled. Also, the color of the runner appearing in a certain race production (the race production for the second and subsequent races) and the expected jackpot expectation (expectation of the winning runner or the expectation when both runners have stopped the race) However, for example, if the color of the runner appearing in the previous race performance (especially the previous race) or lower than expected big hit expectation, the race performance (the execution of only that particular race performance is stopped) The previous race effect may be executed, or the execution of all the race effects including the previous race effect and the subsequent race effects may be stopped.) . By doing in this way, the big hit expectation degree of the race production other than the last can be made accurate, and the production effect is improved.

(Modification 4)
The variable display (simply variable display) of the identification information (special drawing, decorative design, general drawing, etc.) includes that the identification information blinks. For example, in special drawings and ordinary drawings, a pattern in which all segments are turned off and one pattern in which at least some segments are turned on (for example, a lost pattern) are alternately included in the variable display of identification information ( In this case, the one pattern (for example, a lost symbol) appears to blink). In addition, variable display may be performed by blinking decorative symbols and ordinary symbols. Further, the identification information variably displayed in the variable display and the identification information as the variable display result may be different. For example, the display of one horizontal bar (“−”) blinks as a variable display of a special figure or an ordinary figure, and the other display (“7” if “big hit”, Deriving and displaying “1” or the like if “lost” is included in the variable display of the identification information. For example, a decorative pattern other than the scrolled decorative pattern may be a confirmed decorative pattern. In addition, a mode in which identification information that was not displayed in the initial predetermined period in one variable display is displayed after the predetermined period is included in the variable display of the identification information (the special symbol is a temporary stop of the final stop symbol) It may be a decorative pattern that appears for the first time at times.) The gaming machine only needs to perform variable display, for example.

(Modification 5)
In the above embodiment, whether or not to change the gaming state after the big hit gaming state to the “probable change state” by determining the big hit type at the start of the fluctuation is determined. Only the round game mode) is determined, and the game state after the jackpot game state is “probable change state” based on the fact that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the jackpot) during the jackpot game state. You may make it.

(Modification 6)
In the above embodiment, in order to notify the effect control board 12 of the change pattern indicating the change mode, such as the change time, the type of reach effect, and the presence or absence of pseudo-continuous, one change pattern command is used when starting change. Although an example of transmission is shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control board 12 by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the gaming control microcomputer 100 uses the first command to indicate whether there is a pseudo-continuity, whether there is a slip effect, etc. before reaching reach (so-called if not reach). A command indicating the variation time and variation mode before the second stop) is transmitted, and the second command has reached the reach such as the type of reach and presence / absence of re-lottery effect (if the reach does not reach, the so-called first You may make it transmit the command which shows the fluctuation | variation time and fluctuation | variation aspect (after 2 stop). In this case, the effect control board 12 may perform the effect control in the change display based on the change time derived from the combination of the two commands. The game control microcomputer 100 notifies the change time by each of the two commands, and the effect control board 12 selects the specific change mode executed at each timing. Also good. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After sending the first command, a certain period of time has passed (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be changed as appropriate. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced.

(Modification 7)
A plurality of timings at which one notification can be executed may be provided (for example, timing before reach establishment, timing after reach establishment, etc.). In this case, the execution timing may be determined by lottery or the like, and the big hit expectation may be varied according to the execution timing.

(Modification 7)
In addition, the image display operation in the image display device for executing the device configuration and data configuration of the gaming machine, the processing shown in the flowchart, the sound output operation in the speaker, and the lighting operation in the game effect lamp and the decoration LED Various production operations including the above can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the gist of the present invention.

(Configuration etc. taking at least a part of the above embodiment as an example)
Next, a description will be given of a configuration taking at least a part of the above-described embodiments and modifications as an example, and further modifications. The following configurations may be omitted as appropriate, or only a part may be adopted. A gaming machine may be configured.

(1) A gaming machine that performs a game (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
A plurality of selection candidates (for example, runners) are presented (for example, two runners appear in a race effect), and one of the presented selection candidates is selected (for example, a race effect) (E.g., winning one of the two runners) and selecting means (eg, CPU 120 for effect control)
As selection candidates that can be presented, the first selection candidates (for example, blue runners and green runners (runners of the first group) with relatively low jackpot expectation) and the first selection candidates when selected A second selection candidate (for example, a red runner and a rainbow runner (second group of runners) having a relatively high jackpot expectation) having a high advantage (for example, a jackpot expectation),
The selection means may include a case where the first selection candidate is not included in the plurality of selection candidates presented (for example, when only a red runner or a rainbow runner appears in a race effect. Than when the first selection candidate is included in the plurality of presented selection candidates (for example, when a blue or green runner appears in a race effect). Do not select any of a plurality of selection candidates at a high rate (for example, see FIG. 20 and FIG. 21) (for example, a pattern in which both runners stop the race in the race effect),
(The content and determination ratio of the production pattern in FIGS. 20 and 21 may be changed so that at least this condition is satisfied).

  The gaming machine may be an enclosed gaming machine that encloses a game medium and gives a score based on the occurrence of a prize. The gaming machine may be a slot machine. Slot machines are not limited to those where bets are set using medals and credits as gaming values, but only slot machines that set betting numbers using gaming balls as gaming values, or only credits as gaming values. It may be a full credit type slot machine that sets the number of bets using.

  For example, when a certain event occurs (when a race performance or the like is executed), the player is given a state that is actually advantageous to the player (privilege game state, BB state in slot machine, AT state, etc.). Or the ratio of being granted, the ratio of giving a privilege being high, the advantageous state being different from the privilege, etc.) (the expectation degree of jackpot), or the ratio being in an advantageous state (for example, , The ratio of the current state of the probability variation state in the latent state in which it is difficult to determine whether or not the current state is the probability variation state).

  An effect that presents and selects a plurality of selection candidates by the selection means (including an aspect that is not selected, hereinafter also referred to as a selection effect) may be any effect. For example, as a race production, three or more runners may race. Further, a battle effect in which two or more characters perform a battle may be performed (the character is selected if the character wins). Moreover, the selection effect which selects either of two or more choices by a roulette etc. like a roulette effect etc. may be sufficient.

  The selection effect may be an effect of presenting and selecting two or more color candidates in order to notify which color the display mode (for example, color) of the hold display image is changed in the pre-reading notice (after that) The color of the hold display image is changed to the color selected in the selection effect, and if no candidate is selected, the color of the hold display image is not changed (for example, the pre-reading notice is not executed). The pre-reading notice is a pre-reading determination (determination for the variable display (special game) corresponding to the random number as a target (target)) performed based on the random number MR1 extracted at the time of starting winning. Based on the results. The read-ahead determination determines whether or not the target is a big hit, whether or not the target fluctuation pattern specifies reach, and whether or not the target fluctuation pattern specifies a specific reach (such as super reach) What is necessary is just to perform using tables, such as FIG.8, FIG.12, FIG.13. The prefetch determination may be executed by the CPU for effect control 120 as well as the CPU 103 (in this case, an effect control command indicating MR1 or the like is supplied to the effect control board 12). Whether or not the pre-reading notice is executed is performed by the effect control CPU 120. The pre-reading notice is, for example, an advance notice by changing the color of the hold display image corresponding to the target, the degree of expectation that the variable display of the target will be in a predetermined state (expected degree of big hit, degree of expectation such as reach). (The degree of expectation differs depending on which color. For this reason, the color candidates presented in the selection effect also have the degree of expectation similar to the color of the hold display image). If the predetermined state is a reach state or the like, the pre-reading advance notice eventually notifies the target jackpot expectation.

  When variable display corresponding to the hold display image (first and second hold display images) is executed, the hold display image is displayed as an image (active display image) corresponding to the variable display being executed. You may make it display on the predetermined area | region (active display image) on the screen of the apparatus 5. FIG. In this case, an active change effect that changes the display mode (for example, color) of the active display image (such as notifying the degree of jackpot expectation according to the changed display mode) may be executed. The selection effect may be, for example, an effect of presenting and selecting two or more color candidates in order to notify which color the color of the active display image is changed during execution of variable display (after that) The color of the active display image is changed to the color selected in the selection effect, and when no candidate is selected, the color of the active display image is not changed (for example, the active change effect is not executed). The presence / absence of execution of the active change effect and the display mode after the change may be determined based on the prefetch determination, or may be performed based on the variable display result or the variation pattern in the variable display start setting process of FIG. Good.

  The effect control CPU 120 may change the display mode of the hold display image and the active display image a plurality of times in the period from the start winning prize to the end of the display of the active display image (for example, each of the variable display for a plurality of times). Etc.) In this case, the transition pattern of the change is collectively determined based on the determination result of the prefetch determination, the determined pattern is held in the RAM 122, and when the execution of variable display up to the target is started, with reference to the held pattern, It may be determined whether or not the display mode of the hold display image and the active display image is changed (whether or not the selection effect is executed). Note that only the hold display image may be changed a plurality of times, and in this case, the transition pattern of the change may be determined collectively based on the determination result of the prefetch determination.

  In this way, the gaming machine includes a means for displaying an image corresponding to a variable display (a variable display that has not yet started or is being executed) and a means for changing the display mode of the image, and the selection is made. The presentation may present a candidate corresponding to the display mode after the change of the image as a selection candidate (when the image is changed to the display mode corresponding to the selected candidate, when no candidate is selected. The display mode is not changed.)

  Further, the selection effect presents and selects a selection candidate corresponding to the reach effect (the selected reach effect is executed. For this reason, the selection candidate also has a big hit expectation degree of the reach effect), Selection candidates corresponding to the notice effect such as a cut-in effect that predicts the jackpot expectation degree (an effect in which a cut that is not related to the previous flow is inserted in the middle of other notice effects or reach effects) A selection candidate corresponding to a type of notice effect may be presented and selected (the selected notice effect is executed. Therefore, the select candidate also has a jackpot expectation level of the notice effect), or the present May be selected by presenting selection candidates for notifying the possibility that the current state is in a probabilistic state when selected in the latent state. The selection effect may be executed in a mini-game in a small area of the image display device 5.

  Two or more of the same selection candidates (selection candidates that have the same advantage when selected) may be presented in one selection effect (all of the presented selection candidates may be the same). There may be one or more selection candidates included in the first selection candidate. One or more selection candidates may be included in the second selection candidate. “The second selection candidate having higher advantage than the first selection candidate” means that each of the selection candidates included in the second selection candidate has a higher advantage than the selection candidate having the highest advantage among the first selection candidates. Is also high (the same applies to other high and low advantages). Further, the plurality of selection candidates that can be presented include only the first selection candidate and the second selection candidate (that is, all selection candidates are classified as either the first selection candidate or the second selection candidate). ) Is preferable, but the third selection candidate, the fourth selection candidate... (For example, a candidate having a higher advantage than the first selection candidate and a lower advantage than the second selection candidate, or a first selection candidate Candidates with lower advantages, candidates with higher advantages than the second selection candidates), and the like may be included.

  When a selection candidate is not selected, a selection candidate that is not presented this time (a selection candidate that can be presented in a selection effect) may be newly appeared and selected (for example, a red runner and a rainbow runner race a race). Stop, and then the blue runner wins).

  The advantage when the selection candidate is not selected is lower than any advantage of the selection candidate presented at that time (advantage when selected) or any advantage of the selection candidates that can be presented Thus, for example, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the selection effect in a mode in which the first selection candidate is not included in the plurality of selection candidates presented, and it is possible to enhance the effect. The advantage when the selection candidate is not selected may be higher than the advantage when the selection candidate is selected (for example, when the red runner and the rainbow runner race and both sides stop the race) The expectation degree of the big hit is larger than the big hit expectation degree when the rainbow runner wins.) In this case, the production effect can be enhanced by increasing the expectation that the selection candidate is not selected. Further, the advantage when the selection candidate is not selected may be the same as the advantage when the selection candidate is selected, or may be lower than the uppermost advantage of each selection candidate and higher than the lowest advantage. (For example, when a red runner and a rainbow runner race and both sides stop the race, the big hit expectation is the same as the big hit expectation when the rainbow or red runner wins, or the rainbow runner It ’s lower than the big hit expectation when you win, and higher than the big hit expectation when the red runner wins.) In this case, the execution frequency of each variation of the selection effect can be made equal, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  The selection candidate presented by the selection effect may include a candidate for giving one point to the meter M when selected. In this case, the jackpot expectation degree of the meter M after the point grant may be an advantage when the selection candidate is selected, or the increase degree of the jackpot expectation degree due to the point grant is when the selection candidate is selected. May be the advantage. The number of points to be given may be varied depending on the selection candidate. As described above, the selection candidate may be one that changes a display mode of a predetermined display (meter M or the like) described later (and notifies that the display mode changes) when selected. .

  With the above configuration, the effect can be enhanced. In particular, the selection means may select one of the plurality of selection candidates at a higher rate when the plurality of presented selection candidates do not include the first selection candidate than when the plurality of presented selection candidates include the first selection candidate. If no selection is made, it is possible to see with a sense of tension which one of the choices is selected when the first selection candidate is not included in the presented plurality of selection candidates, thereby enhancing the production effect. be able to.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
The selection means can present a plurality of selection candidates at a plurality of timings including a first timing and a second timing (see, for example, FIGS. 21 and 23),
When a plurality of selection candidates not including the first selection candidate is presented at the first timing, the ratio of selecting any of the plurality of selection candidates is different (for example, when presented at the second timing (for example, FIG. 21)
You may make it (it may change the content and determination ratio of production patterns, such as FIG. 20, FIG. 21, so that this condition may be satisfied at least).

  When the second timing comes later than the first timing, the ratio of selecting any of the plurality of selection candidates may be lower at the second timing.

  With the above configuration, the presentation timing of selection candidates is noticed, and the effect of production is enhanced.

(3) In the above gaming machine (1) or (2),
Further provided is a special effect execution means (for example, a CPU 120 for effect control) for executing a special effect (for example, one announcement) having a high advantage,
When a plurality of selection candidates not including the first selection candidate are presented, any of the plurality of selection candidates is more when the special effect is executed than when the special effect is not executed. Is high (see, for example, FIG. 21)
You may make it (it may change the content and determination ratio of production patterns, such as FIG. 20, FIG. 21, so that this condition may be satisfied at least).

  In the above-described embodiment, the special effect is a single announcement, but the special effect may not be a jackpot finalizing effect such as a single announcement. For example, it may be a notice effect that informs that the degree of advantage such as the big hit expectation degree is higher than a predetermined standard (the big hit is not confirmed) (the effect aspect may be changed).

  With the above configuration, special effects are attracting attention, and the effects are enhanced.

(4) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (3),
The advantage when none of the plurality of selection candidates is selected is lower than the advantage when any of the plurality of selection candidates is selected (see, for example, FIGS. 20 and 21).
You may make it (it may change the content and determination ratio of production patterns, such as FIG. 20, FIG. 21, so that this condition may be satisfied at least).

  With the configuration described above, the player pays attention to whether or not a selection candidate is selected, so that the effect of production can be enhanced.

(5) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (4),
The selection means includes
A plurality of selection candidates can be presented at a plurality of timings including a first timing and a second timing after the first timing (see, for example, FIGS. 21 and 23).
A plurality of selection candidates are presented such that the respective advantages of the plurality of selection candidates presented at the second timing are not lower than the advantages of the plurality of selection candidates presented at the first timing (for example, FIG. 21),
You may make it (it may change the content and determination ratio of production patterns, such as FIG. 20, FIG. 21, so that this condition may be satisfied at least).

  According to such a structure, a player's discouragement etc. can be prevented and a production effect can be heightened. In addition, the object which is not lowered may be the advantage of the selection candidate selected by the selection unit or the advantage when the selection candidate is not selected.

  Note that the respective advantages of the plurality of selection candidates presented at the second timing may be less likely to be lower than the advantages of the plurality of selection candidates presented at the first timing. For example, a pattern having a lower advantage is prepared as an effect pattern for a race effect, but the determination ratio of the pattern is set to be lower than a pattern in which the advantage is not lowered. Further, the object to be made difficult to decrease may be the advantage of the selection candidate selected by the selection means or the advantage when the selection candidate is not selected. Even in this case, for example, a pattern having a low advantage is prepared in the effect pattern of the race effect, but the determination ratio of the pattern is set lower than a pattern in which the advantage is not low. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the frequency of the player's discouragement and the like, and to enhance the effect.

(6) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (5),
Predetermined display control means (for example, the production control CPU 120 in the first modification) capable of changing the display mode of the predetermined display (for example, the meter M) in a stepwise manner according to the degree of advantage;
After performing a common introduction effect (for example, an effect of displaying the card G and “pseudo ream?”, Etc.), a successful effect (for example, turning over the card G, the letters “pseudo ream” are written on the turned card G). A specific effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect, etc.) is performed to perform one of a certain effect or the like (for example, an effect in which the card G is turned and nothing is written on the flipped card G). Specific production execution means (for example, CPU 120 for production control in modification 1),
The specific effect execution means is configured to perform the specific effect (for example, pseudo) in which the failure effect is performed in a predetermined period (for example, another effect execution limit period, etc.) after it is notified that the display mode of the predetermined display changes. (For example, see FIG. 27)
You may do it.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the failure performance being executed without limitation during the predetermined period.

  The advantage here may be a different kind of advantage from the advantage (1) and the like (the advantage and the object (1) are different).

  In the predetermined display, a plurality of characters and figures are displayed in a form that is difficult to visually recognize, such as only a silhouette or semi-transparent, and the character and figure are sequentially changed to a normal display, and the display form is gradually changed. It may change.

  The display mode of the predetermined display may be changeable at a plurality of timings. In such a case, it is possible to prevent anxiety that the display mode of the predetermined display will no longer change due to the failure effect, and to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

  The end of the predetermined period may be at an arbitrary timing.

  The change of the display mode of the predetermined display, the specific effect, or the like may be a kind of prefetching notice based on the prefetching determination. In this case, the predetermined period (such as another effect execution restriction period) may be until the end of the variable display of the target, or until the end of the variable display that is executed when notifying that the display mode of the predetermined display changes. It is good. Further, any other timing may be used. Moreover, the change of the display mode of a predetermined display, a specific effect, etc. may be implement | achieved by various other effects. The change in the display mode of the predetermined display may be performed when the selection candidate selected by the selection effect is a specific candidate (the notification of the change is, for example, that the specific candidate is selected itself). May be)

  The specific effect, for example, whether or not other effects such as pseudo-ream, super reach, pre-reading notice, etc. are executed (introduction effect), and notification or suggestion of execution (success effect) is not executed. What is necessary is just the effect which alert | reports or suggests (failure effect). Further, the specific effect may be the above-described point giving effect. In this case, from the display of the arrow P2 and the target P1 (moving up and down) to before the arrow P2 is fired is the introduction effect, the effect that the arrow P2 hits the target P1 is the success effect, and the arrow P2 is the target P1. Production that does not hit (disengage) is a failure production. As described above, the specific effect may be an effect in which the display mode of the predetermined display is changed (including notification of the change) by the success effect and the display mode of the predetermined display is not changed by the failure effect. . The effect executed when notifying that the display mode of the predetermined display changes (the effect capable of notifying that the display mode of the predetermined display changes) and the specific effect are the same executed at a plurality of timings. It may be a production.

  The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there is a change or addition in a range not departing from the gist of the present invention in addition to the above-described embodiment and other examples described later.

  Moreover, it is good also as combining all or one part structure arbitrarily among the structure shown to embodiment mentioned above and each modification, and the structure shown to the below-mentioned embodiment and each modification.

  In addition, it should be thought that the above-described embodiment and the later-described embodiment disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the above description and the descriptions below, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

As other gaming machines of the present invention, there are other gaming machines (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 901, etc.) that can be variably displayed and controlled in an advantageous state,
A plurality of selection candidates (for example, runners) are presented (for example, two runners appear in a race effect), and one of the presented selection candidates is selected (for example, a race effect) (E.g., winning one of the two runners) and selecting means (for example, the production control CPU 120),
Specific display means for performing specific display in which the display mode can be changed in stages according to the degree of advantage (for example, CPU 90120 for effect control for performing specific display effects);
Special notification execution means (for example, a CPU 90120 for effect control that performs abnormality notification) capable of executing a special notification for notifying information related to a game,
As selection candidates that can be presented, the first selection candidates (for example, blue runners and green runners (runners of the first group) with relatively low jackpot expectation) and the first selection candidates when selected A second selection candidate (for example, a red runner and a rainbow runner (second group of runners) having a relatively high jackpot expectation) having a high advantage (for example, a jackpot expectation),
The selection means presents the plurality of selections presented when the plurality of presented selection candidates do not include the first selection candidate (for example, when only a red runner or a rainbow runner appears in the race effect). When the first selection candidate is included in the candidates (for example, when a blue or green runner appears in a race effect), any of the plurality of selection candidates is higher (for example, see FIGS. 20 and 21). (For example, a pattern in which both runners stop racing during the race)
The specific display means changes the display mode of the specific display when a predetermined period has elapsed after the display mode of the specific display is notified to change (for example, an icon as a specific display is displayed). Notification of specific display change notification is continuously performed for a predetermined period of time, and then an icon is displayed (specific display changes, etc.)
The notification execution means can execute the special notification even during a predetermined period after it is notified that the display mode of the specific display is changed (for example, it is notified that an icon as the specific display is displayed). For example, it is possible to report an abnormality within a predetermined period thereafter)
A gaming machine characterized by this.

  According to the above gaming machine, it is possible to enhance the production effect. In addition, it is possible to grasp the gaming situation even in a predetermined period after it is notified that the display mode of the specific display is changed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interest.

  In the above gaming machine, “presentation that presents a plurality of selection candidates and selects one of the plurality of presented selection candidates” (also referred to as “selection effect”) and “changeable stepwise depending on the degree of advantage” The “effect for performing specific display” and the “special notification for notifying information related to the game” may be executed simultaneously or individually. Further, when executed at the same time, they may be displayed in duplicate on the image display device, or may be displayed so as not to overlap. For example, in one variable display, first, an aspect of performing an effect of performing a specific display that can be changed stepwise according to the degree of advantage, and then performing a selection effect, or first performing a selection effect, For example, an aspect of performing an effect of performing a specific display that can be changed in stages according to the degree of advantage is possible.

  In the gaming machine, the display mode of the selection effect may change during the effect. In addition, special notification related to the selection effect may be executed, such as a special notification for notifying that the display mode of the selection effect changes, or a special notification indicating the result of the selection effect.

Furthermore, as an example of the form of a gaming machine that can prevent a decrease in gaming interest,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a pachinko gaming machine 901, etc.) capable of performing variable display and controlling to an advantageous state,
Specific display means for performing specific display in which the display mode can be changed in stages according to the degree of advantage (for example, CPU 90120 for effect control for performing specific display effects);
Special notification execution means (for example, a CPU 90120 for effect control that performs abnormality notification) capable of executing a special notification for notifying information related to a game,
The specific display means changes the display mode of the specific display when a predetermined period has elapsed after the display mode of the specific display is notified to change (for example, an icon as a specific display is displayed). Notification of specific display change notification is continuously performed for a predetermined period of time, and then an icon is displayed (specific display changes, etc.)
The notification execution means can execute the special notification even during a predetermined period after it is notified that the display mode of the specific display is changed (for example, it is notified that an icon as the specific display is displayed). For example, it is possible to report an abnormality within a predetermined period thereafter)
A gaming machine characterized by this. Below, an example of the form example of this gaming machine will be described as another form example.

(Other examples)
Hereinafter, an embodiment relating to another embodiment will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 28 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 902 that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 903 that supports and fixes the gaming board 902. On the game board 902, a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails is formed. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

  A first special symbol display device 904A and a second special symbol display device 904B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 28, on the right side of the game area). Each of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes), and is identified in a special graphic game as an example of a variable display game. Special symbols (also referred to as “special graphics”), which are a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be displayed, are variably displayed (variable display). For example, each of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B variably displays a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B are limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. However, for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns in which the combination of the LED to be turned on and the LED to be turned off in the 7-segment LED may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols.

  A plurality of special symbols are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A is also referred to as “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 904B is also referred to as “second special symbol”. .

  The first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B are both formed in a square shape, for example. Note that the type of the first special figure and the type of the second special figure may be the same (for example, both a number indicating “0” to “9” and a symbol indicating “−”). May be different. Further, each of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B may be configured to variably display, for example, numbers (or two-digit symbols) indicating “00” to “99”. .

  An image display device 905 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 902. The image display device 905 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 905, corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 904B in the special symbol game. For example, in a decorative symbol display area serving as a plurality of variable display units such as three, decorative symbols that are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can be identified are variably displayed. This variable display of decorative designs is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R are arranged in the display area of the image display device 905. Then, in response to the start of one of the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A and the variation of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 904B in the special symbol game, In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, variation of decorative symbols (for example, vertical scroll display) is started. After that, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R on the image display device 905 are displayed. Then, the finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

  As described above, in the display area of the image display device 905, the special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A or the special special game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 904B. In synchronism with the figure game, variable display of a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can be identified is performed, and a definite decorative symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as “derivation”). In addition, for example, deriving and displaying various display symbols such as a special symbol and a decorative symbol means that identification information such as a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as a complete stop display or a final stop display) and the variable display is ended. . On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern until the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed, the variation speed of the decorative pattern becomes “0”, The symbol may be displayed in a stationary state, for example, in a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not displayed deterministically, the player can recognize that the variation of the decorative pattern due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. The temporary stop display may include displaying the decorative symbols completely stopped for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

  For example, eight kinds of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese characters) are displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbols 905L, 905C, and 905R. It may be any combination of numbers, English letters, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, letters, symbols, and character images. Character images may be, for example, people, animals, other objects, or , A decorative image showing a symbol such as a character or other arbitrary figure). A corresponding symbol number is assigned to each of the decorative symbols. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” are assigned to alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”, respectively. Note that the number of decorative symbols is not limited to eight, and may be any number as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a jackpot combination or a combination that is lost can be configured (for example, seven types or nine types).

  After the decorative symbol variable display is started, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R are displayed until the fixed decorative symbol that is the variable display result is derived and displayed. In FIG. 5, for example, scroll display is performed such that the symbol number sequentially flows from the top to the bottom from the smallest to the largest, and when the decorative symbol having the largest symbol number (for example, “8”) is displayed, The decorative symbol having the smallest symbol number (for example, “1”) is displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R (for example, the “left” decorative symbol display area 905L), the symbols are scrolled from the largest symbol number to the smallest symbol symbol. When the decorative design having the smallest number is displayed, the decorative design having the largest design number may be displayed.

  In the display area of the image display device 905, a start winning storage display area 905H is arranged. In the start winning memory display area 905H, a hold memory display for displaying the variable display hold number (special figure hold memory number) corresponding to the special figure game is specified. Here, the variable display suspension corresponding to the special game is that the game ball passes through the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 906A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B. Generated based on the start winning by entering (entering). That is, the start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game or a variable display of decorative symbols has been established, but a variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. When the start condition that allows the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Done.

  In the example shown in FIG. 28, the first hold for displaying the number of special figure hold memories in an identifiable manner on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B together with the start winning memory display area 905H. A display 9025A and a second hold display 9025B are provided. The first hold indicator 9025A displays the first special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified. The second hold indicator 9025B displays the second special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner. The number of first special figure hold memory is the number of memory in which the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. The second special figure hold memory number is the number of memories in which the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. The variable display hold memory number obtained by adding the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number is also referred to as a total hold memory number. When simply referring to the “number of special figure hold memory”, it usually refers to a concept including any of the first special figure hold memory number, the second special figure hold memory number, and the total hold memory number. It may refer to a concept that includes the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number but excludes the total reserved memory number).

  Below the image display device 905, an ordinary winning ball device 906A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 906B are provided. The normal winning ball device 906A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B has an electric motor having a pair of movable blades that are changed into a normal open state that is a vertical position and an expanded open state that is a tilt position by a solenoid 9081 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided, and a start area (second start area) and a second start winning opening are formed.

  As an example, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 906B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 9081 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, so that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening. It is difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 906B, the game ball passes through the second start winning opening by the tilt control in which the movable blade piece is tilted when the solenoid 9081 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the ON state ( It will be in an expanded open state that is easy to enter. In the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B, although the game ball can enter the second start winning opening even in the normal open state, there is a possibility that the game ball may enter more than in the expanded open state. You may comprise so that it may become low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball device 906B may be configured so that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning port in the normally open state, for example, by closing the second starting winning port. In this way, the second start winning port as the second start area is in an expanded open state in which game balls easily pass (enter) and in a normally open state in which game balls are difficult to pass (enter) or cannot pass (enter). To change.

  A game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 906A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. A game ball that has passed (entered) a second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B is detected by, for example, a second start opening switch 9022B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start switch 9022A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first special figure holding memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “ 4 ") If the following, the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 9022B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second special figure holding memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “ 4 ") If the following, the second start condition is satisfied. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 9022A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 9022B. May be the same number or different numbers.

  A special variable winning ball device 907 is provided below the normal winning ball device 906A and the normal variable winning ball device 906B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 907 includes a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 9082 for the special winning opening door shown in FIG. As a big prize opening.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 907, when the solenoid 9082 for the big prize opening door is in the OFF state, the big winning opening door closes the big winning opening and the game ball passes (enters) the big winning opening. Make it impossible. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 907, when the solenoid 9082 for the big prize opening door is in the ON state, the big prize opening door opens the big winning opening, and the game ball passes through the big winning opening (entrance). ) Make it easier. In this way, the special winning opening as a specific area changes into an open state in which a game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enters) and is disadvantageous to the player To do. Instead of the closed state where the game ball cannot pass (enter) through the big prize opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially opened state where the game ball hardly passes (enters) through the big prize port may be provided.

  A game ball that has passed (entered) through the big prize opening is detected by, for example, a count switch 9023 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of game balls by the count switch 9023, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) the large winning opening that has been opened in the special variable winning ball apparatus 907, the gaming ball passes through other winning openings such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, for example. More prize balls are paid out than when passing (entering). Therefore, if the special prize winning device 907 is in the open state, the game ball can enter the special prize opening, which is a first state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the special prize winning device is closed in the special variable prize winning ball device 907, it becomes impossible or difficult for the player to obtain a prize ball by passing (entering) the game ball to the special winning prize opening. This is a disadvantageous second state.

  A normal symbol display 9020 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 28, on the left side of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 9020 is composed of 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs, etc., like the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol. Is displayed (variably displayed) in a variable manner. Such variable display of normal symbols is called a general game (also referred to as “normal game”).

  Above the normal symbol display device 9020, a general symbol hold display device 9025C is provided. The general-purpose hold indicator 9025C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general-purpose hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passage gate 9041.

  In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 902 is provided with a windmill and a number of obstacle nails that change the flow direction and speed of the game ball. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, a single or plural general winning openings that are always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that a game ball that has entered one of the general prize openings is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  Speakers 908L and 908R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 903, and a game effect lamp 909 is provided at the periphery of the game area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, a normal winning ball device 906A, a normal variable winning ball device 906B, a special variable winning ball device 907, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 901. A hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area is provided at the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 903. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the driving of a shooting motor included in the hitting ball shooting device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 903 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. )) Is provided. A lower plate that holds (stores) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is provided below the gaming machine frame 903.

  A stick controller 9031A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a member that forms the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, a central portion of the lower plate). Yes. The stick controller 9031A includes an operation stick gripped by the player, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation stick (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator is hooked when the player holds the operation stick). Yes. The trigger button can be operated in a predetermined direction by performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) while the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 9031A with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). What is necessary is just to be comprised. A trigger sensor that detects a predetermined instruction operation such as a push / pull operation on the trigger button may be incorporated in the operation rod.

  A tilt direction sensor unit for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the main body of the lower plate below the stick controller 9031A. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit includes two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged in parallel to the board surface of the game board 902 on the left side of the center position of the operating rod when viewed from the player side facing the pachinko gaming machine 901. And a pair of transmissive photosensors (vertical sensor pairs) arranged perpendicularly to the surface of the game board 902 on the right side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the player side. What is necessary is just to be comprised including the photo sensor.

  The member that forms the upper plate includes, for example, a push button 9031B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 9031A). Is provided. The push button 9031B may be configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor for detecting an operation action of the player performed on the push button 9031B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 9031B.

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be schematically described.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 901, the normal symbol display 9020 performs variable display of the normal symbol such that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 9041 provided in the gaming area is detected by the gate switch 9021 shown in FIG. For example, the normal symbol display device 9020 is established based on the fact that the normal symbol start condition for starting variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied, for example, that the previous general symbol game has been completed. The usual game is started.

  In this normal game, after the normal symbol change is started, when a predetermined time as the normal symbol change time elapses, the fixed normal symbol that is a variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol), such as a number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “ordinary loss”. Become. Corresponding to the fact that the normal symbol variable display result is "per normal figure", the expansion and release control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B is tilted. The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  After the first start condition is satisfied, for example, when a game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 906A is detected by the first start opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. On the basis of the fact that the first start condition has been established, for example, because the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state has ended, the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 904A is started. In addition, the second start condition is satisfied because, for example, the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B is detected by the second start opening switch 9022B shown in FIG. Later, based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, because the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state has ended, the special figure game by the second special symbol display device 904B is started.

  In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B, after the variable symbol display time as the special symbol variable time has elapsed after the variable symbol special display is started, the variable symbol variable symbol display The resulting definite special symbol (special diagram display result) is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a “big hit” as the specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small bonus symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, it becomes “small hit” as a predetermined display result. Further, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol, the game is “lost”.

  After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state in which a round advantageous to the player (also referred to as “round game”) is executed a predetermined number of times. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the small hit game state is controlled as a special game state different from the big hit game state.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 901 in this embodiment, as an example, the special symbol indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” is the big hit symbol, and the special symbol indicating the number “2” is the small hit symbol. , The special symbol indicating the symbol “−” is a lost symbol. Each symbol such as a big hit symbol, a small bonus symbol, or a lost symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A is different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 904B. Alternatively, a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a big hit symbol, a small bonus symbol, or a lost symbol.

  After the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a specific symbol in the special game, and the special display result is “big hit”, the big winning door of the special variable winning ball device 907 is set to a predetermined upper limit time in the big hit gaming state. The grand prize opening is opened in a period until (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 second) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. Thereby, the round which makes the special variable winning ball apparatus 907 the 1st state (open state) advantageous for a player is performed.

  A special prize opening device that opens the grand prize opening during the execution of a round receives a game ball that falls on the surface of the game board 902, and then closes the special prize opening, thereby providing a special variable prize ball device. 907 is changed to the second state (closed state) disadvantageous to the player, and one round is completed. The round that is the opening cycle of the big prize opening can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, “15” or the like). Even before the number of rounds has reached the upper limit, the execution of the round may be terminated when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball has not won a big prize opening). .

  Among rounds in the big hit game state, rounds in which the upper limit time for which the special variable winning ball apparatus 907 is in the first state (open state) advantageous for the player is relatively long (for example, 29 seconds) are normally open. Also called round. On the other hand, a round in which the upper limit time for which the special variable winning ball apparatus 907 is in the first state (open state) is relatively short (for example, 0.1 second) is also referred to as a short-term open round.

  Of the special symbols showing the numbers "3", "5", and "7" that are jackpot symbols, the special symbols showing the numbers "3" and "7" are normally open round jackpot symbols and the number "5" The special symbol indicating is a short-term open round jackpot symbol. In the big hit game state (normal open big hit state) as the normal open round specific game state that is controlled after the normal open round big hit symbol is derived as the fixed special symbol in the special figure game, the big winning opening of the special variable winning ball apparatus 907 The door is in the open state in a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) as the first period elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. By doing this, a round is executed in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 907 is changed to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player. The normal open big hit state is also referred to as a first specific game state.

  In the big hit gaming state (short-term open big hit state) as the short-term open round specific game state controlled after the short-term open round big hit symbol is derived as the fixed special symbol in the special figure game, the special variable winning ball apparatus 907 is set in each round. A second time period (for example, 0) that the upper limit time for changing to the first state advantageous to the player (the upper limit of the period during which the big prize opening is opened by the big prize opening door) is shorter than the first period in the normal opening big hit state. 1 second). Note that in the short-term open big hit state, it is only necessary to control the opening period of the big prize opening to be the second period, and other control may be performed in the same manner as the normal open big hit state. Alternatively, in the short-term open big hit state, the number of rounds may be set to a second round number (eg, “2”) that is smaller than the first round number (eg, “15”) in the normal open big hit state.

  In such a short-term open big hit state, a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls (prize balls) can be obtained if a game ball wins a big winning opening. However, the opening period of the special winning opening is the second period (such as 0.1 second) and is very short. For this reason, the short-term open big hit state is a big hit gaming state in which a ball (prize ball) cannot be obtained substantially. The short-term open big hit state is also called a second specific game state.

  In addition, the jackpot gaming state as the short-term opening round specific gaming state is not limited to the one with a short winning opening period compared to the big hit gaming state as the normal opening round specific gaming state, for example, the opening of the big winning mouth The period (upper limit time) is the same in the short-term open round specific game state and the normal open round specific game state, but in the short-term open round specific game state, there is an upper limit number of times (for example, two times) that makes the big prize opening state open. It may be less than the upper limit number of times (for example, 15 times) in the normal open round specific game state. That is, in the big hit gaming state as the short-term opening round specific gaming state, the period during which the game ball is changed to the first state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) in each round is longer than the first period in the normal opening round specific gaming state. As long as it is at least one of the short second period and the number of executions of the round being the second round number less than the first round number in the normal open round specific gaming state. .

  After the special symbol indicating the number “2” as the small hit symbol is derived as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the small hit gaming state as the special gaming state is controlled. In this small hit game state, similarly to the short-term open big hit state, a variable winning operation is performed in the special variable winning ball apparatus 907 to change the big winning opening to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player. That is, in the small hit gaming state, for example, the operation of setting the special variable winning ball device 907 to the first state (open state) over the second period is repeatedly executed.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R provided in the image display device 905, a special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A and In response to the start of any of the special symbol games using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 904B, the decorative symbol variable display is started. A period from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the end of variable display due to the stop display of the fixed decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. Then, the variable display state of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach state.

  Here, the reach state is a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped when the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 905 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination (“reach variation symbol”). Is also a display state in which the variation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, a part of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905R, etc.) in advance. The remaining decorative symbol display area (for example, “medium”) that has not yet been stopped when the decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol indicating the alphanumeric character “7”) that constitutes the determined jackpot combination is stopped. In the symbol display area 905C, etc.), the decorative symbols are changing, or the decorative symbols are a big hit in all or part of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R. This is a display state that changes in synchronization while constituting all or part of the combination.

  Further, in response to the reach state, the decorative pattern fluctuation speed is reduced, or a character image (effect image simulating a person) different from the decorative pattern is displayed in the display area of the image display device 905. Or changing the display mode of the background image, playing and displaying a moving image that is different from the decorative design, or changing the variation mode of the decorative design, performing a different rendering operation than before reaching the reach state May be. Such effect operations such as display of the character image, change of the display mode of the background image, reproduction display of the moving image, and change of the decorative pattern change mode are referred to as reach effect display (or simply reach effect). In the reach effect, not only the display operation in the image display device 905 but also the sound output operation by the speakers 908L and 908R, the lighting operation (flashing operation) in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 909, and the like are in the reach state. An operation mode different from the previous operation mode may be included.

  As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Each reach mode has a different possibility of “big hit” (also referred to as “reliability” or “big hit reliability”). That is, it is possible to vary the possibility that the variable display result will be a “hit” depending on which of the multiple types of reach effects is executed.

  As an example, in this embodiment, reach modes such as normal reach and super reach are set in advance. Then, when the reach form of super reach appears, the possibility that the variable display result will be “big hit” (expected degree of big hit) is higher than when the reach form of normal reach appears.

  During the variable display of decorative designs, unlike reach production, the variable display status of decorative designs may become reach status, and the variable display result may be a `` big hit '', etc. There may be a case where a variable display effect for informing the player is given in accordance with a variable display mode of decorative symbols. In this embodiment, variable display effects such as “sliding” and “pseudo-continuous” can be executed. It is only necessary to determine whether or not to execute variable display effects such as “sliding” and “pseudo-continuous” in response to a change pattern being determined on the main board 9011 side. Whether or not the variable display effect of “slip” is to be executed on the side of the effect control board 9012 may be determined regardless of the variation pattern determined on the side of the main board 9011.

  In the “sliding” variable display effect, the decorative symbols are changed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, and then a plurality of decorative symbol display areas (for example, After the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905R, etc., a predetermined number (for example, “1” or “2” of the temporarily stopped display of decorative symbols is displayed. )) In the decorative symbol display area (for example, one or both of the “left” decorative symbol display area 905L and the “right” decorative symbol display area 905R), An effect display for changing the decorative design to be stopped is performed. Thus, in the variable display effect of “slip”, a predetermined number of decorative symbols are displayed after temporary display of a plurality of decorative symbols from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the display of a definite decorative symbol resulting in variable display. When the variable display state of the decorative pattern is re-executed, the variable display state of the decorative pattern becomes the reach state, and when the decorative symbol constituting the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state. is there.

  In the “pseudo-ream” variable display effect, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in response to one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special figure game being satisfied once. Before the final determined decorative symbols are derived and displayed, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbols display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. The effect display in which the decorative symbols are changed (rechanged) again in all the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R can be performed a predetermined number of times (for example, up to three times). In this embodiment, the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations is excluding the first fluctuation from the start of variable display of decorative symbols until all temporary decorative symbols are temporarily stopped for the first time, “left”, “middle”, “right” The decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R indicate the number of times the decorative symbol is re-variable.

  In the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, for example, any one of a plurality of predetermined pseudo-ream chances in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. Once the decorative symbols constituting the are temporarily displayed as a predetermined display result, variable display (revariation) is performed again thereafter. The quasi-continuous chance may include a combination of decorative symbols that is a predetermined non-reach combination, instead of the variable display mode of decorative symbols. In addition, the quasi-continuous chance may include a combination of decorative symbols that becomes a predetermined reach-losing combination (also simply referred to as “reach combination”) after the decorative symbol variable display mode becomes the reach mode. For example, a decorative symbol (middle symbol) that is stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 905C among the pseudo consecutive chances is replaced with a special decorative symbol (pseudo consecutive chance symbol) that is not used in the variable display of the decorative symbol at normal time. ). Among the decorative symbols that are also used in the variable display of decorative symbols at normal times, a pseudo consecutive chance symbol that becomes a false consecutive chance by being stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 905C may be included. .

  In this embodiment, a re-variation (pseudo-continuous variation) is performed in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, so that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once, and the decorative design You can make the variable display appear as if it were started several times in a row. In the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect in this embodiment, the re-variation (pseudo-continuous variation) is performed at most once for easy understanding. The number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations may be executed more than once, for example, 2 or 3. In the variable display of “pseudo-continuous” in this embodiment, the pseudo-change that indicates whether or not re-variation is performed after the temporary stop display is performed (that is, whether or not the pseudo-continuous chance eye is temporarily stopped). Continuous production is performed. Specifically, in the pseudo-continuous production, the “left” and “right” decorative symbols are displayed temporarily stopped, and the pseudo-continuous chance symbols are displayed (the pseudo-continuous chances common to the successful and unsuccessful effects described later). A design is displayed), and an effect is performed to inquire whether or not the pseudo-continuous chance symbol is temporarily displayed. A mode in which the pseudo continuous chance symbol is stopped and displayed is called a success effect, and a mode in which the temporary stop display is not displayed is called a failure effect. As described above, in the “quasi-ream” variable display effect in this embodiment, since re-variation is performed once at most, re-variation is performed on the variation pattern of the pseudo-ream that is not re-variable. If the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is performed based on the change pattern, the failure effect is executed. Become. In addition, instead of displaying a special decorative symbol such as a pseudo-reliable chance symbol in the pseudo-continuous production, or with a special decorative symbol being stopped, each variable display by the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect (initial variation) In the period of (including), a predetermined effect image such as a specific character image may be displayed on the screen of the image display device 905 (displayed as a common introduction effect).

  In addition to “slip” and “pseudo ream”, variable display effects using the variable display operation of such decorative patterns include, for example, “Development chance eyes”, “Development chance eyes end”, “Slip after chance eyes stop” Various production operations such as these may be executed. Here, in the variable display effect of “Development Opportunity”, “Left”, “Middle”, “Right” from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the display of the fixed decorative pattern resulting in the variable display result. ”In the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, the decorative symbols constituting the development chances included in the predetermined special combination are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to the reach state. A predetermined reach production is started. As a result, when the decorative symbol constituting the development opportunity is temporarily stopped, the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, and the variable display result becomes “big hit” after the reach state is reached. Expectation is enhanced.

  In addition, in the variable display effect of “end of development opportunity”, after the decorative symbol variable display is started, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R are all displayed. Then, an effect display is performed in which a decorative pattern having a predetermined combination as an opportunity for development is derived and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern. In the variable display effect of “slip after the chance stop”, as with the variable display effect of “pseudo ream”, after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed. , After temporarily displaying the decorative symbols of the lost combinations (special combinations) that are the pseudo continuous chances in all of the decorative symbols display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, Unlike the “pseudo-ream” variable display effect that changes the decorative symbols again in all of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, the decorative symbols change again in some of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. By doing so, an effect display for changing the decorative design to be stopped is performed.

  When a special symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable symbol display state is not changed to the reach state after the variable symbol variable display is started. In addition, a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a decorative display variable display mode is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable symbol display state is reached after the variable symbol variable display starts. Correspondingly, after the reach effect is executed, or when the reach effect is not executed, a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined reach lose combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the decorative design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variable display result is “lost”.

  Out of special symbols that become normal open round jackpot symbols as special symbols for special game, the regular jackpot symbol such as the special symbol indicating “3” and the probable bonus symbol such as the special symbol indicating “7” are stopped. In the case of display, a combination of multiple types of jackpots after a predetermined reach effect is executed or a reach effect is not executed in response to the variable display state of the decorative symbol being reached. Among these, the fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. For example, the symbol numbers that are variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R in the image display device 905 are the determined decorative symbols that are jackpot combinations. Any one of the “8” decorative symbols is stopped and displayed on a predetermined active line in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. Anything is acceptable.

  Whether or not to control to the probabilistic state after the end of the big hit gaming state during execution of a predetermined round in the big hit gaming state after the decisive decorative symbol that becomes the big hit combination is derived and displayed (whether the probable change as a privilege is given) The promotion effect during the jackpot that is the bonus granting effect is executed. As will be described in detail later, in the jackpot promotion effect, for example, a battle effect in which characters fight in the display area of the image display device 905 may be performed. Then, it may be notified so that the player can recognize whether or not there is a promotion (a probability change as a privilege is given or not) that becomes a probability change state after the end of the big hit game state due to the victory or defeat of the main character. The jackpot promotion effect is not during the execution of the round in the jackpot game state, but the period from the start of the jackpot game state or the end of one round in the jackpot game state until the start of the next round, The game may be performed in a period from the end of the last round in the big hit gaming state to the start of the next variable display game. Further, the jackpot promotion promotion effect may be executed during the first variable display game after the end of the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot promotion effect that is executed after the final round in the jackpot game state is particularly called “ending promotion effect”.

  In the jackpot promotion effect, the fact that the game state after the end of the jackpot gaming state becomes a probable change state (notifying that a privilege is granted) is notified, and the fact that the jackpot promotion success effect is not announced There is a promotion failure during jackpot (notifying that the privilege is not granted). When the big success promotion effect during the big hit is executed, the gaming state after the big hit gaming state is controlled to the probability change state. On the other hand, when the jackpot promotion promotion effect is performed, the gaming state after the big hit gaming state is not controlled to the probability variation state (non-probability variation state), and is controlled to the time reduction state. In the probability variation state, the variable display result of each special figure game and decorative symbols is improved so that the probability that the variable display result becomes “big hit” and is further controlled to the big hit gaming state is higher than in the normal state and the short-time state. . Such a probability change state continues until the next variable display result is a “big hit”, regardless of the number of executions of the special game. The short-time state is a gaming state in which the variable symbol variable display time (special-figure variation time) in the special-figure game is shortened compared to the normal state. The normal state is a normal game state that is different from a specific game state such as a big hit game state, etc., and an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 (for example, initialization processing after power-on, such as when a system reset is performed) The same control as in the state in which is executed. Such a time-short state is when a special condition game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) or when the variable display result is “big hit”, when either of the conditions is established first. finish.

  In the probabilistic state and the short time state, the normal symbol display 9020 controls the normal symbol in the normal symbol game so that the variation time of the normal symbol (ordinary symbol variation time) is shorter than that in the normal state, and the normal symbol is variable in each regular symbol game. Control for improving the probability that the display result is “per normal” than in the normal state, and tilt control of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B based on the fact that the variable display result is “per normal” The game ball can easily pass (enter) the second start winning opening, such as a control to make the tilt control time for performing longer than that in the normal state, and a control to increase the number of tilts than in the normal state. Control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility that the start condition is satisfied. It should be noted that any one of these controls may be performed in the probability variation state or the short time state, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. As described above, the control that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening in the probability changing state or the short-time state is also referred to as high opening control. By performing the high opening control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening becomes the expanded opening state is higher than when the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 904B can be easily established, and the special figure game can be executed frequently. In addition, the time until the variable display result becomes “big hit” is shortened. Therefore, in the probability variation state and the short time state, it becomes easier to reach a big hit gaming state than in the normal state (a gaming state advantageous to the player). The period during which the high opening control can be performed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to either the certain change state or the short-time state. . Further, it is also said that the gaming state is in the high base during the high opening control period. On the other hand, when it is not the high opening control period, it is said that the gaming state is in the low base. The time-short state in this embodiment is a gaming state that is also referred to as a low probability and high base state, and the normal state is a gaming state that is also referred to as a low probability and low base state. In addition, the probability variation state is a gaming state that is also referred to as a highly accurate and high base state. That is, when the jackpot promotion success effect is executed, the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is controlled to the probability changing state, so that it is controlled to the high probability high base state. On the other hand, when the promotion success during the big hit is performed, the gaming state after the big hit gaming state is not controlled to the probability variation state (non-probability variation state), and is controlled to the short-time state. It will be controlled by the state.

  The probability variation state may include not only the time variation control and the high opening control performed together with the probability variation control, but also the state where only the probability variation control is performed and the time reduction control and the high opening control are not performed. As an example, after the end of the 15 round big hit state based on the fact that the variable display result in the special figure game is “probable big hit”, the first positive change state (high high accuracy high speed control and high speed control are performed together with the positive change control) (Also called base state). After that, when the number of executions of the special figure game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times) without the special figure display result being “big hit”, the probability variation control is continuously performed, but the time reduction control or the high opening control is performed. It is also possible to control to a second certain variation state (also referred to as a high certainty low base state) that is not performed after the completion of. In addition, after the end of the two-round big hit state based on the fact that the variable display result in the special game is “abrupt big hit” in the normal state, the state shifts to the second positive change state and only the positive change control is performed. However, the time reduction control and the high opening control may not be performed. On the other hand, after the end of the two round big hit state based on the fact that the variable display result in the special figure game is “surprise big hit” when in the probability changing state or the short time state, the state shifts to the first probability changing state, Short time control and high opening control may be performed together with the probability variation control. Alternatively, after the end of the 15 round big hit state based on “probability big hit”, the control is changed to the first positive change state until the special figure display result becomes “big hit” again, while the two round big hit state based on “surprise big hit” After the completion, the process shifts to the first certain change state, and when the number of executions of the special figure game reaches a predetermined number without causing the special figure display result to be “big hit”, the shift to the second certain change state is made. May be. While the short-time control and the high-open control are started and ended simultaneously (interlocked), the start and end of the probability variation control is not necessarily linked to the start and end of the short-time control and high-open control. May be.

  As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, when a short-term open round jackpot symbol such as a special symbol indicating “5” is stopped or displayed, or a small bonus symbol such as a special symbol indicating “2” is stopped or displayed. In some cases, the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not reach the reach state, and any one of a combination of a plurality of types of fixed decorative symbols determined in advance as the chance of opening may be displayed in a stopped manner. In addition, when the short-term opening round jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, a predetermined reach effect is executed in response to the variable symbol display state of the ornament symbol being reached. After that, a fixed decorative pattern (a fixed decorative pattern serving as a chance corresponding to the short-term open round big hit state) that is a predetermined reach combination may be stopped and displayed.

  Corresponding to the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becomes a short-term open round jackpot symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol in which various fixed ornament symbols are stopped and displayed is when the variable display result is "big hit" This is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as a “big hit type”) of “surprise accuracy” (also referred to as “surprise probability big hit” or “sudden probability change big hit”). The short-term open big hit state may be controlled based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” in the “big hit” big hit type.

  Based on the fact that the small hit symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number “2” is stopped and the variable display result is “small hit” as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the small hit game state is controlled. After that, the gaming state is not changed, and the gaming state before the variable display result is “small hit” is continuously controlled. However, if the number of executions of the special figure game in the special gaming state has reached a predetermined number when the special figure game with the variable display result of “small hit” is executed, after the end of the small hit gaming state, The special gaming state may end and return to the normal state.

  If the winning symbol is opened after the final decorative symbol composing the opening chance is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the decorative symbol, the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “accurate” There is a case where it is controlled to a short hit big hit state based on that, and a case where it is controlled to a small hit gaming state based on the fact that the variable display result is “small hit”. On the other hand, the winning winning opening is opened after the definite decorative symbols constituting the reach combination are derived and displayed as the variable display result of the decorative symbols. The variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “exact” Only when it is controlled to a short-term open big hit state. Therefore, the confirmed decorative symbols that make up the opening chances correspond to being controlled to either the short-term open big hit state or the small hit gaming state, while the fixed decorative symbols of the reach combination are short-term open big hit states It corresponds to being controlled by.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 901, various control boards such as a main board 9011, an effect control board 9012, an audio control board 9013, and a lamp control board 9014 as shown in FIG. 29 are mounted. The pachinko gaming machine 901 is also equipped with a relay board 9015 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back of the game board 902 and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  The main board 9011 is a main-side control board, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 are mounted. The main board 9011 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch arranged at a predetermined position, an effect control board 9012 and the like. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 9011 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B to perform the first special diagram and the second special diagram. Variable display of a predetermined display pattern such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 9020, or controlling the variable symbol display of the normal symbol display 9020 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring control of the normal symbol display 9020. It also has a function to control.

  The main board 9011 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 90100, a switch circuit 90110 that receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 90100, and a game control microcomputer 90100. A solenoid circuit 111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 9081 and 9082 is mounted.

  The effect control board 9012 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 9011, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015, and receives the image display device 905, speakers 908L, 908R. Various circuits for controlling the production operation by the electrical parts for production such as the game effect lamp 909 are mounted. In other words, the effect control board 9012 provides effects such as display operation in the image display device 905, all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 908L and 908R, and all or part of the on / off operation in the game effect lamp 909 or the like. A function of determining the control content for causing the electrical component to execute a predetermined performance operation is provided.

  The sound control board 9013 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and outputs sound from the speakers 908L and 908R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012. For example, a processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 9014 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and is turned on / off in the game effect lamp 909 and the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012. A lamp driver circuit for driving is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 29, the main board 9011 is connected to wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 9021, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, and the count switch 9023. Note that the gate switch 9021, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, and the count switch 9023 have an arbitrary configuration that can detect a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor. What is necessary is just to have. Further, on the main board 9011, a first special symbol display device 904A, a second special symbol display device 904B, a normal symbol display device 9020, a first hold display device 9025A, a second hold display device 9025B, and a general drawing hold display device 9025C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 toward the effect control board 9012 is relayed by the relay board 9015. The control command transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 via the relay board 9015 is an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal, for example. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 905, a sound control command used for controlling sound output from the speakers 908L and 908R, and a game effect lamp 909. And a lamp control command used for controlling the lighting operation of the decoration LED and the like.

  A game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main board 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 90101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, etc., and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 90102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 90103 that executes a control program by executing a game control program, and updates numeric data indicating random values independently of the CPU 90103 A random number circuit 90104 to perform and an I / O (Input / Output port) 90105 are provided.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 90100, processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is executed by the CPU 90103 executing a program read from the ROM 90101. At this time, the CPU 90103 reads fixed data from the ROM 90101, the CPU 90103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 90102 and temporarily stores them, and the CPU 90103 temporarily stores the various fluctuation data stored in the RAM 90102. The CPU 90103 receives input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105, and the CPU 90103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  The random number circuit 90104 only needs to count numerical data indicating some or all of various random numbers used to control the progress of the game. The CPU 90103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 90104, such as a random counter provided in the RAM 90102, for example, and periodically or irregularly updates various numerical data by software, so that a part of various random values can be obtained. You may make it count the numerical data which show. Software executed by the CPU 90103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the update operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 90104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 90104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as game random numbers.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 90101 provided in the game control microcomputer 90100 stores various selection data and table data used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 90101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, and the like prepared for the CPU 90103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 90101 is configured with a table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 90103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 9011 and a variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns. Table data to be stored is stored.

  FIG. 30 shows a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is “losing”, the variable display mode of the decorative design is “non-reach” and “reach”, respectively. When the display result is “big hit”, when the big hit type is “non-probability change” or “probability change” or “surprise change”, or when the variable display result is “small hit” Correspondingly, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach” is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as “non-reach loss variation pattern”) and is variable. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is “losing” and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as “reach loss variation pattern”). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “lost”. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” is referred to as a big hit variation pattern.

  The big hit fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a reach reach effect of normal reach is executed and a super reach change pattern in which a reach effect of super reach is executed. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “small hit” is referred to as a small hit variation pattern. The big hit variation pattern and the small hit variation pattern are included in the hit variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. The super reach variation pattern has a reach effect such as super reach A and super reach B regardless of whether the variable display result is “big hit” or “lost”. In the example shown in the figure, an example is shown in which a “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is performed in a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” or the variable display result is “lost”. However, the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect may also be performed when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise” or when the variable display result is “small hit”. Moreover, although the variation pattern in which the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is performed is an example of a super reach variation pattern, it may be a normal reach variation pattern or a non-reach variation pattern. Similarly, for the fluctuation pattern of the pseudo ream, if the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, or the variable display result is “small hit”, there may be normal reach or non-reach. Also good. Further, as described above, the example shown in the figure shows an example in which the quasi-continuous variation is a maximum of one time, but there is a variation pattern that can be executed more than once, for example, two times three times. May be. In addition, variable display effects such as “sliding” and “pseudo-continuous” may be performed in the other variation patterns shown in the figure.

  The RAM 90102 included in the game control microcomputer 90100 shown in FIG. 29 may be a backup RAM that is partially or entirely backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 90102 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). The In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. Such a RAM 90102 is provided with an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 90100 includes an I / O 90105 for inputting various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 90100 and for transmitting various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100. And an output port.

  As shown in FIG. 29, an effect control board 9012 provides an effect control CPU 90120 that performs control operations according to a program, an ROM 90121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area for the effect control CPU 90120. Random number for updating numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the RAM 90122, the display control unit 90123 for executing processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 905, and the CPU 90120 for effect control A circuit 90124 and an I / O 90125 are mounted.

  As an example, in the effect control board 9012, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the effect control program read from the ROM 90121, thereby executing a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electrical component. At this time, the production control CPU 90120 reads fixed data from the ROM 90121, the production control CPU 90120 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 90122, and temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the production control CPU 90120 enters the RAM 90122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the reception control CPU 90120 receives input of various signals from the outside of the presentation control board 9012 via the I / O 90125, and the presentation control CPU 90120 is an I / O. A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 9012 through O90125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 90120, the ROM 90121, and the RAM 90122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 9012.

  On the effect control board 9012, wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 905, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 9013, A wiring for transmitting an electrical decoration signal as an information signal indicating lamp data is connected to the lamp control board 9014. Further, on the effect control board 9012, wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the stick controller 9031A has been detected from the controller sensor unit 9035A, and a game for the push button 9031B. Wiring for transmitting from the push sensor 9035B an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the user's operation action has been detected is also connected.

  In the effect control board 9012, for example, the random number circuit 90124 counts numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation so as to be updatable. The random number used for controlling such a production operation is also called a production random number.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 90121 mounted on the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. 29 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM 90121 includes a plurality of determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 90120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data configuring the determination table, pattern data configuring various effect control patterns, and the like. It is remembered.

  As an example, in the ROM 90121, the effect control CPU 90120 controls effect operations by various effect devices (for example, the image display device 905, the speakers 908L and 908R, the game effect lamp 909, the decoration LED, the effect model, etc.). An effect control pattern table storing a plurality of types of effect control patterns to be used is stored. The effect control pattern is composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. The effect control pattern table only needs to store, for example, an effect control pattern during special figure change, a notice effect control pattern, and various effect control patterns.

  The special-control variation production control pattern corresponds to a plurality of types of variation patterns in the period from the start of the variation of the special symbol in the special-sign game until the finalized special symbol that is the special-sign display result is derived and displayed. Consists of data indicating the contents of control of various effect operations, such as effect display operations in decorative symbol variable display operations, reach effects, re-lottery effects, etc., or various effect display operations that do not involve variable display of decorative symbols Has been. The notice effect control pattern is composed of data indicating the control content of the effect operation that becomes the notice effect executed in response to the notice pattern in which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns are composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. Among the special-fluctuation effect production control patterns, for example, a plurality of types of reach production control patterns with different production modes in each reach production may be included for each variation pattern that executes the reach production.

  The effect control CPU 90120 sets an effect control pattern (special-figure change effect control pattern) based on the change pattern indicated in the change pattern designation command, for example, when variable display of decorative symbols is started. The effect control CPU 90120 sets a corresponding effect control pattern (notice effect control pattern), for example, when execution of a predetermined effect such as a notice effect is started. Here, when setting the effect control pattern, pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern may be read from the ROM 90121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122, or the corresponding effect control pattern is configured. The storage address of the pattern data in the ROM 90121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122, and the reading position of the storage data in the ROM 90121 may be designated. A command according to the effect control pattern set in this way is output from the effect control CPU 90120 to the display control unit 90123, the audio control board 9013, and the like. In the display control unit 90123 that has received a command from the effect control CPU 90120, for example, a predetermined VDP or the like develops the image data indicated by the command by reading it from an image data memory such as CGROM and temporarily storing it in the VRAM. On the voice control board 9013 that has received a command from the effect control CPU 90120, for example, the voice synthesis IC reads the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and temporarily stores it in the voice RAM or the like. . After that, every time the production control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the production control process timer judgment values. If they match, the production operation according to the corresponding various control data Control.

  The RAM 90122 mounted on the effect control board 9012 is provided with an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be described.

  In the main board 9011, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 90100 is activated, and the CPU 90103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 90103 performs necessary initial settings after setting the interrupt disabled. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 90102 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 90100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 90103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 90103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a loop process may be entered after executing a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 to the state at the previous power supply stop.

  CPU90103 which performed such game control main processing will perform the game control timer interruption process shown in FIG. 31, if the interruption request signal from CTC is received and an interruption request | requirement is received. When the game control timer interrupt process is started, the CPU 90103 first executes a predetermined switch process, whereby the gate switch 9021, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, and the count are performed via the switch circuit 90110. The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as the switch 9023 is determined (step S9011). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S9012). Thereafter, by executing predetermined information output processing, for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 901 is output (step S9013).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as random number values MR1 'to MR3' used on the main board 9011 side by software is executed (step S9014). Thereafter, the CPU 90103 executes special symbol process processing (step S9015). In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 90102 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901, and displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform operation control and open / close operation setting of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball apparatus 907 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process, a normal symbol process is executed (step S9016). The CPU 90103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED, etc.) in the normal symbol display 9020 by executing the normal symbol process, thereby moving the normal symbol variable display and the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B. Enables setting of the tilting movement of the blade.

  After executing the normal symbol process, the CPU 90103 transmits the control command from the main board 9011 to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 9012 by executing the command control process (step S9017). As an example, in the command control processing, the output control board 9012 among the output ports included in the I / O 90105 corresponds to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the RAM 90102. After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal, and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time and then turned off. Thus, it is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process performed in step S9015 of FIG. In the special symbol process shown in FIG. 32, the CPU 90103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S90101). FIG. 33 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S90101 of FIG. 32 as the start winning determination process.

  In the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 33, the CPU 90103 first determines the first based on the detection signal from the first start opening switch 9022A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 906A. It is determined whether the start port switch 9022A is on (step S90201). At this time, if the first start port switch 9022A is on (step S90201; Yes), the first special figure holding memory number, which is the holding memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value. It is determined whether or not (for example, “4” as the upper limit storage number) (step S90202). The CPU 90103 only needs to be able to specify the first special figure reserved memory number by reading the first reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the RAM 90102, for example. When the number of first special figure reservation storage is not the upper limit value in step S90202 (step S90202; No), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the RAM 90102 is set to “1” (step S90203).

  When the first start-up switch 9022A is OFF in step S9021 (step S90201; No), or when the first special figure reservation storage number has reached the upper limit value in step S90202 (step S90202; Yes), normal It is determined whether or not the second start port switch 9022B is on based on a detection signal from the second start port switch 9022B provided corresponding to the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball apparatus 906B ( Step S90204). At this time, if the second start port switch 9022B is ON (step S90204; Yes), the second special figure holding memory number that is the holding memory number of the special figure game using the second special figure is a predetermined upper limit value. It is determined whether or not (for example, “4” as the upper limit storage number) (step S90205). The CPU 90103 only needs to be able to specify the second special figure reserved memory number by reading the second reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter provided in the RAM 90102, for example. When the second special figure reservation storage number is not the upper limit value in step S90205 (step S90205; No), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the RAM 90102 is set to “2” (step S90206).

  After executing one of the processes of steps S90203 and S90206, the number of special figure hold storages corresponding to the start port buffer value that is the stored value of the start port buffer is updated by 1 (step S90207). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the first reserved memory number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the second reserved memory number count value is incremented by one. Thus, the first reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. Further, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total pending storage number is also updated so as to be incremented by 1 (step S90208). For example, the total reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter provided in the RAM 90102, may be updated so as to add one.

  After executing the processing of step S90208, the CPU 90103, among the numerical data updated by the random counter of the random number circuit 90104 and the RAM 90102, the random value MR1 ′ for determining the special figure display result and the random value for determining the jackpot type Numerical data indicating MR2 ′ is extracted (step S90209). The random value MR1 ′ for determining the special figure display result indicates whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the like in the special figure game is controlled as a big hit game state, and whether the variable display result is “small hit”. This is a random value used to determine whether or not to control the winning gaming state, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “65535”, for example. For the jackpot type determination random number MR2 ′, the jackpot type which is the variable display mode of the decorative symbol when the variable display result is “big hit” is determined as “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change”. For example, a value in the range of “0” to “99”. The CPU 90103 executes numerical value data indicating a part or all of the random values used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display result and the variable display time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol by executing the process of step S90209. Extract. In this embodiment, the random value MR1 ′ and the random value MR2 ′ are extracted in the process of step S90209. However, as described above, the random value MR2 ′ is used to determine the jackpot type. Since it is a random value, it may be extracted only when the determination result of the random value MR1 ′ is “big hit”. In this case, the random value MR2 'may be extracted after it is determined Yes in step S90241 in FIG.

  The numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S90210). For example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 ′ and MR2 ′ is set in the first special figure reservation storage unit 90151A as shown in FIG. When the mouth buffer value is “2”, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 ′ and MR2 ′ is set in the second special figure reservation storage unit 90151B as shown in FIG.

  The first special figure storage unit 90151A shown in FIG. 34A generates a start prize (first start prize) when the game ball passes (enters) the first start prize port formed by the normal prize ball device 906A. However, the hold data of the special figure game that has been started but has not yet been started (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 904A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 90151A associates the reservation number with the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first start winning opening, and sets the first start condition in the passage (entrance) of the game ball. Based on the establishment, the CPU 90103 extracts the random number value MR1 ′ for determining the special figure display result and the random number value MR2 ′ for determining the jackpot type, which are extracted from the random number circuit 90104, etc. Until the upper limit value (for example, “4”) is reached. The hold data stored in the first special figure storage unit 90151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. Based on the (result), it becomes the hold information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a predetermined game value is given.

  In the second special figure holding storage unit 90151B shown in FIG. 34 (B), the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 906B, and the start winning (second start winning) is made. The pending data of the special figure game that has been generated but has not yet started (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 904B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit 90151B associates the holding number with the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second start winning opening, and sets the second starting condition in the passage (entrance) of the game ball. Based on the establishment, numerical data indicating the special figure display result determining random number value MR1 ′ or the jackpot type determining random number value MR2 ′ extracted from the random number circuit 90104 or the like by the CPU 90103 is set as reserved data, and the number is predetermined. Store until the upper limit value (for example, “4”) is reached The hold data stored in the second special figure storage unit 90151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is being held, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. On the basis of (result), it becomes the hold information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a predetermined game value is given.

  Note that the holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition by passing (entering) the game ball through the first starting winning opening and the gaming ball passing (entering) through the second starting winning opening. Thus, the hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start port data indicating whether the game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning port or the second start winning port may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. .

  Subsequent to the processing of step S90210 shown in FIG. 33, transmission setting of a start opening prize designation command corresponding to the start opening buffer value is performed (step S90211). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the storage address of the first starting port winning designation command table in the ROM 90101 is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. To transmit a first start opening prize designation command for notifying 9012 that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 904A is established. Set up. On the other hand, when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the storage address of the second starting port winning designation command table in the ROM 90101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. The second special symbol display device 904B performs a setting for transmitting a second start opening prize designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure is established. . The start opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 by executing a predetermined command control process after the special symbol process is completed, for example.

  Thereafter, for example, the storage address of the reserved memory count notification command table in the ROM 90101 is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, etc. Is set to transmit either the first reserved memory number notification command for notifying the second reserved memory number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved memory number (step S90212). The reserved memory number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 by executing a predetermined command control process after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. Instead of the first pending storage number notification command and the second pending storage number notification command, a total pending storage number notification command for notifying the total pending storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command for notifying an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number may be used.

  After executing the process of step S90212, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is “1” or “2” (step S90213). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is “1” (step S90213; “1”), the starting port buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to “0” (step S90214), and then step S90204. Proceed to the process. On the other hand, when the starting port buffer value is “2” (step S90213; “2”), the starting port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to “0” (step S90215). The start winning determination process is terminated. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 9022A and the second start port switch 9022B detect a valid start winning of a game ball at the same time, the processing based on the detection of both effective start winnings can be surely completed.

  After executing the start winning determination process in step S90101 in FIG. 32, the CPU 90103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S90110 to S90120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 90102.

  The special symbol normal process in step S90110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal process, the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol are based on the presence / absence of reserved data stored in the first special symbol storage unit 90151A and the second special symbol storage unit 90151B. It is determined whether or not to start the special game using the display device 904B. In the special symbol normal process, whether or not the variable symbol display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set to “big hit” or “small hit” based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 ′ for determining the special symbol display result. The variable display result is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, in response to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, the confirmed special symbol (the jackpot symbol or the like in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B). Either a small hit symbol or a lost symbol) is set. In the special symbol normal process, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S90111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, variation is performed using numerical data indicating a random value MR3 ′ for variation pattern determination based on a result of prior determination as to whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. Processing for determining one of a plurality of patterns is included. The random value MR3 ′ for determining the variation pattern is a random value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. It takes a value in the range of “251”. When the variation pattern setting process is executed and the variable symbol variable display is started, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “2”.

  By the special symbol normal processing in step S90110 and the variation pattern setting processing in step S90111, a fixed special symbol, a special symbol, and a variation pattern including a variable symbol display time that is a variable symbol display result are determined. That is, the special symbol normal processing and the variation pattern setting processing use the special symbol random number MR1 ′ for determining the special symbol display result, the random value MR2 ′ for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 ′ for determining the variation pattern. And a process for determining a variable display mode of the decorative design.

  The special symbol variation process in step S90112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation processing includes processing for performing settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol has started variation. It includes processing to measure For example, each time the special symbol variation process of step S90112 is executed, the first special symbol display device subtracts 1 or adds 1 to the special symbol variation timer value that is a stored value in the special symbol variation timer provided in the RAM 90102. Regardless of whether the game is a special game using the first special graphic in 904A or a special graphic game using the second special graphic in the second special symbol display device 904B, the elapsed time is measured by a common timer. Done. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached a special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. As described above, the special symbol variation process in step S90112 is performed in the special symbol variation in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A, or in the second special symbol display device 904B. It suffices if it is a process for controlling the variation of the special symbol in the special figure game using the figure by a common processing routine. When the elapsed time since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process in step S90113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In the special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B stops the variation of the special symbol, and the definite special symbol that is the variable symbol display result is stopped (derived). A process for performing the setting is included. Then, a determination is made as to whether or not the big hit flag provided in the RAM 90102 is on. If the big hit flag is on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the small hit flag is on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. When both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”. In addition, the special symbol stop process in step S90113 includes a process for determining whether or not the time-short state is ended, and for setting to transmit a command to notify the effect control board 9012 when it is ended. (The command itself is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 9012 in the command control process described above).

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S90114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit release pre-processing includes a process for starting the execution of the round in the big hit gaming state and setting the big winning opening to the open state based on the fact that the variable display result becomes “big hit”, etc. include. In this case, for example, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened may be set in accordance with whether the big hit type is “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change”. For example, in response to the big hit type of “non-probability change” or “probability change”, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “29 seconds” and the upper prize is set to the upper limit number of times to execute the round. By setting the number of times of opening the mouth to “15 times”, it is only necessary to set the normal open big hit state. On the other hand, corresponding to the big hit type “surprise”, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “0.1 second”, and the number of opening of the big winning opening that becomes the upper limit number of times to execute the round is set. Is set to “15 times” to set the short-term open big hit state. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”.

  The big hit release processing in step S90115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. The big hit opening process includes a process for measuring an elapsed time since the big winning opening is in an open state, a measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 9023, and the like. The process etc. which determine whether it became the timing which returns to a closed state from an open state are included. Then, when returning the prize winning opening to the closed state, after performing processing for stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 9082 for the prize winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”. . In addition, the big hit release process in step S90115 includes a process of setting to send a prize ball command indicating that to the side of the effect control board 9012 when a game ball is detected by the count switch 9023. (The command itself is transmitted to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 9012 in the command control process described above).

  The big hit release post-processing in step S90116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-hit opening process, the process of determining whether or not the number of rounds in which the winning opening is in the open state has reached the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening, or the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening has been reached. In some cases, processing for setting to transmit a jackpot end designation command is included. When the number of round executions has not reached the maximum value of the number of times of winning the special winning opening, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”. The value of the process flag is updated to “7”.

  The big hit end process in step S90117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In the jackpot end process, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect as an effect operation for informing the end of the jackpot gaming state is executed by an effect device such as the image display device 905, the speakers 908L and 908R, and the game effect lamp 909 is executed. Includes processing to wait until the time has elapsed, and processing to perform various settings (start setting for probability variation state and time reduction state) to start probability variation control and time reduction control in response to the end of jackpot gaming state Yes. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The small hit release pre-processing in step S90118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. The pre-opening process for small hits includes a process for setting the big winning opening in the small hit game state based on the fact that the variable display result is “small hit”. As an example, when the variable display result is “small hit”, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is the same as when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. Setting to “0.1 seconds” and setting the number of times of opening of the big winning opening to “15 times” may be performed so that the small hit gaming state is set. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “9”.

  The small hit releasing process in step S90119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In the small hit opening process, the process for measuring the elapsed time since the big prize opening is in the open state, and the timing for returning the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time, etc. The process etc. which determine whether or not were included are included. When returning the big prize opening to the closed state, a process for stopping the supply of the drive signal to the solenoid 9082 for the big prize opening door may be executed.

  The small hit end process in step S90120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. In this small hitting end process, there is a waiting time corresponding to a period during which an effect operation for informing the end of the small hit gaming state is performed by an effect device such as the image display device 905, the speakers 908L and 908R, and the game effect lamp 909. Processing that waits until the time has passed is included. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 before the small hit gaming state is continued without changing the state of the probability change flag or the short time flag. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit gaming state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S90110 of FIG. 32 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 35, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the second special figure holding storage number is “0” (step S90231). The second special figure holding memory number is the holding memory number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B. For example, in the process of step S90231, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the RAM 90102 may be read and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

  When the second special figure reservation storage number is other than “0” in step S90231 (step S90231; No), the second special figure storage unit 90151B stores the correspondence corresponding to the reservation number “1”. As the data, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 ′ for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 ′ for determining the jackpot type are read out (step S90232). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S9022, the second special figure reserved memory number is updated by subtracting 1 from the second reserved memory number count value, and the second special figure reserved memory is updated. The pending data indicating the random number values MR1 ′ to MR3 ′ stored in the entry lower than the hold number “1” (for example, the entry corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) in the unit 90151B is higher by one entry. (Step S90233). Further, in the process of step S90233, the total reserved storage number count value stored in the total reserved storage number counter in the RAM 90102 may be updated by one. At this time, the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is updated to “2” (step S90234).

  When the second special figure reserved memory number is “0” in step S90231 (step S90231; Yes), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved memory number is “0” (step S90235). The first special figure reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A. For example, in the processing of step S90235, the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter is read from the RAM 90102, and it is determined whether or not the read value is “0”. As described above, the process of step S90235 is executed when it is determined in step S90231 that the second special figure reserved memory number is “0”, and the first special figure reserved memory number is “0”. It is determined whether or not. Thereby, execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure.

  Note that the special game using the second special figure is not limited to a game executed with priority over the special graphic game using the first special figure. The execution of the special game may be started in the order in which the game balls enter (pass) and start winnings are generated. In this case, a table for storing data capable of specifying the order in which the start winnings are generated is provided, and the execution of the special game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. It only has to be determined.

  When the first special figure reservation storage number is other than “0” in step S90235 (step S90235; No), the first special figure storage unit 90151A stores the correspondence corresponding to the reservation number “1”. As the data, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 ′ for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 ′ for determining the jackpot type are read out (step S90236). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation.

  Following the processing of step S90236, for example, by updating the first reserved memory number count value by subtracting 1 and updating the first special figure reserved memory number, the first special figure reserved memory is updated. In the unit 90151A, the hold data indicating the random number values MR1 ′ and MR2 ′ stored in the entries lower than the hold number “1” (for example, entries corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) are placed one entry higher. Shift is performed (step S90237). In the process of step S90237, the RAM 90102 may be updated to subtract 1 from the total reserved storage number count value stored in the total reserved storage number counter. At this time, the variable special figure designation buffer value is updated to “1” (step S90238).

  After executing one of the processes in steps S90234 and S90238, the special chart display result, which is the variable symbol display result of the special symbol, is used as a use table for determining whether to be “big hit” or “losing”. A special figure display result determination table corresponding to the special figure designation buffer value is selected and set (step S90239). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the first special figure display result determination table 90130A shown in FIG. 36A is set in the usage table. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the second special figure display result determination table 90130B shown in FIG. 36B is set in the usage table. Further, the CPU 90103 may select special figure display result determination table data corresponding to the current gaming state.

  The first special figure display result determination table 90130A displays the variable display result before the fixed special symbol that is the variable display result is derived and displayed in the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A. Whether or not to control the big hit gaming state as “big hit” and whether or not to control to the small hit gaming state with the variable display result as “small hit” based on the random value MR1 ′ for determining the special figure display result This table is referred to for determination. The second special figure display result determination table 90130B displays the variable display result before the fixed special symbol that is the variable display result is derived and displayed in the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B. Whether or not to control the big hit gaming state as “big hit” and whether or not to control to the small hit gaming state with the variable display result as “small hit” based on the random value MR1 ′ for determining the special figure display result This table is referred to for determination.

  In the first special figure display result determination table 90130A, a special figure display is made depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is a normal state, a short time state (low accuracy state), or a probability variation state (high accuracy state). A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 ′ for determining the result is assigned to the special figure display results of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “losing”. In the second special figure display result determination table 90130B, depending on whether the gaming state is a normal state, a short time state (low probability state), or a probability variation state (high probability state), the special figure display result determination table A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the numerical value MR1 ′ is assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” or “losing”.

  In the first special figure display result determination table 90130A and the second special figure display result determination table 90130B, the table data indicating the determination value compared with the random value MR1 ′ for determining the special figure display result indicates the special figure display result as “ It is data for determination assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control to the big hit gaming state as “big hit”. In each of the first special figure display result determination table 90130A and the second special figure display result determination table 90130B, when the gaming state is the probability variation state (high probability state), the normal state or the short time state (low probability state). More decision values are assigned to the “big hit” special figure display result. Thereby, in the probability variation state (high probability state) in which probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 901, the special figure display result is “big hit” compared to the normal state or the short time state (low probability state). If the state is controlled, the probability of being determined increases. That is, in each of the first special figure display result determination table 90130A and the second special figure display result determination table 90130B, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is in a probabilistic state, compared to when it is in a normal state or a short time state. Thus, the determination data is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the probability of being determined to control the jackpot gaming state increases.

  In the setting example of the first special figure display result determination table 90130A, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of “30000” to “30350”) are assigned to the special figure display results of “small hits”. On the other hand, in the setting example of the second special figure display result determination table 90130B, the determination value is not assigned to the special figure display result of “small hit”. With such a setting, the variable display result is determined based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A is satisfied, The case where the variable display result is determined based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B is established. The ratio determined to be controlled in the small hit gaming state as “small hit” can be varied.

  In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the special figure display result is “small hit” and the small hit game state is controlled. In a gaming state where a game ball is likely to enter the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 906B, such as a state (highly accurate high base state), frequent occurrence of a small hit gaming state in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball By avoiding this, it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interests due to an extended game. In the second special figure display result determination table 90130B, a predetermined range of determination values different from the settings in the first special figure display result determination table 90130A are assigned to the special figure display result of “small hit”. Also good. For example, in the second special figure display result determination table 90130B, a smaller determination value than the first special figure display result determination table 90130A may be assigned to the “small hit” special figure display result. In this way, when the high base state such as the short-time state or the probability change state is set, the proportion determined to be controlled in the small hit gaming state may be lower than when the low base state such as the normal state or the short-time probability change state is used. Good. Alternatively, regardless of which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied, the special figure display result may be determined with reference to the common special figure display result determination table.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S90239 shown in FIG. 35, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 ′ for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for variation is changed to “big hit”, “small hit”, “lost”. By comparing with the determined value assigned to each special figure display result, it is determined whether the special figure display result is “big hit”, “small hit”, or “losing” (step S90240).

  Since the special figure display result determination table data corresponding to the current gaming state is selected in step S90239, in the process of step S90240, the gaming state when the variable display of the special figure game or the like is started is a certain change state. Whether or not the special figure display result is “big hit” is determined using different determination data. For example, when the game state when the variable display of a special figure game or the like is started is a normal state or a short time state, the game state is indicated in the first special figure display result determination table 90130A or the second special figure display result determination table 90130B. The table data corresponding to the normal state or the short time state is selected as the normal determination data, and the special figure display result corresponding to the random value MR1 ′ is determined with reference to this table data. On the other hand, when the game state when the variable display of the special figure game or the like is started is a certain change state, the game state is determined in the first special figure display result determination table 90130A or the second special figure display result determination table 90130B. The table data corresponding to the probability variation state is selected as the special determination data, and the special figure display result corresponding to the random value MR1 ′ is determined with reference to the table data.

  After the special figure display result is determined in step S90240, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “big hit” (step S90241). If it is determined that the game is a “hit” (step S90241; Yes), the big hit flag provided in the RAM 90102 is set to an ON state (step S90242). At this time, the big hit type determination table 90131 shown in FIG. 37 is selected and set as a use table for determining the big hit type as one of a plurality of types (step S90243).

  The jackpot type determination table 90131 determines the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types based on the random number MR2 ′ for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the special figure display result is “big hit” and the game is controlled in the jackpot game state. This is a table that is referred to. In the big hit type determination table 90131, the special symbol that is variably displayed (changed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A) or the second special symbol (second Depending on whether it is a special symbol game by the special symbol display device 904B, the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR2 ′ for determining the big hit type is “non-probability change”, “probability change”, “surprise change”, etc. It is assigned to multiple types of jackpot types.

  In the setting example of the big hit type determination table 90131, the assignment of the decision value to the big hit type of “surprise” differs depending on whether the variation special chart is the first special figure or the second special figure. That is, when the fluctuation special chart is the first special figure, the predetermined value (the value in the range of “82” to “99”) is assigned to the big hit type of “surprise”, while the fluctuation special figure Is the second special figure, no decision value is assigned to the big hit type of “surprise”. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined as one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A is satisfied. And a case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B is satisfied. Thus, the rate at which the jackpot type is determined to be “surprising” can be varied. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the big hit type is “surprise” and the short-open big hit state is controlled. In a gaming state where a game ball can easily enter the second start winning opening formed by 906B, frequent occurrence of a short-term open big hit state in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball can be avoided, and a decrease in game interest due to a prolonged game can be prevented. .

  Even when the fluctuation special chart is the second special figure, a predetermined range of determination values different from the case where the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure may be assigned to the “surprise” jackpot type. Good. For example, when the fluctuation special chart is the second special figure, a smaller decision value may be assigned to the “surprise” jackpot type than when the fluctuation special chart is the first special figure. Alternatively, regardless of whether the fluctuation special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart, the jackpot type may be determined with reference to the common table data.

  By referring to the jackpot type determination table 90131 set in step S90243 shown in FIG. 35, the numerical data indicating the jackpot type determination random number value MR2 ′ stored in the fluctuation random number buffer is changed to “non-probable change”, Depending on which of the determined values assigned to each jackpot type of “probability change” and “surprise probability” is matched, it is determined which jackpot type is a plurality of types (step S90244).

  By determining the jackpot type in the process of step S90244, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is any of the short-time state and the probable state that is more advantageous to the player than the short-time state. It is determined before the fixed special symbol as the variable display result is derived. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value which is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the RAM 90102 (step S90245), the determined jackpot type is stored. As an example, if the big hit type is “non-probable change”, the big hit type buffer value may be “0”, “probable change” may be “1”, and “surprise” may be “2”.

  When it is determined in step S90241 that it is not “big hit” (step S90241; No), it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “small hit” (step S90246). When it is determined that the “small hit” is determined (step S90246; Yes), the small hit flag provided in the RAM 90102 is set to an ON state (step S90247).

  If it is determined in step S90246 that it is not “small hit” (step S90246; No), or after performing any of the processes in steps S90245 and S90247, whether to control to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state? A predetermined special symbol is set in accordance with the result of the prior determination of whether or not, and further, the determination result of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot game state (step S90248). As an example, if it is determined in step S90246 that the special figure display result is not “small hit”, the result is a lost pattern corresponding to the pre-determined result indicating that the special figure display result is “lost”. The special symbol indicating the symbol “−” is set as the confirmed special symbol. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S90246 that the special figure display result is “small hit”, the small figure corresponding to the pre-determined result indicating that the special figure display result is “small hit”. The special symbol indicating the number “2” as the symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. If it is determined in step S90241 that the special figure display result is “big hit”, “3”, “5”, “7”, which are big hit symbols, according to the determination result of the big hit type in step S90244. Any of the special symbols indicating the numbers "" is set as the confirmed special symbol. That is, according to the determination result that the jackpot type is “non-probable change”, the special symbol indicating the number “3” that is the normal jackpot symbol among the normal open round jackpot symbols is set as the confirmed special symbol. Also, according to the determination result that the jackpot type is “probable change”, the special symbol indicating the number “7” that becomes the probability variable big hit symbol among the normal open round big hit symbols is set as the confirmed special symbol. A special symbol indicating the number “5”, which is a short-term open big hit symbol, is set as the confirmed special symbol according to the determination result that the big hit type is “accuracy”.

  After the confirmed special symbol is set in step S90248, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” which is a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S90249), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. . In step S90235, if the number of reserved games stored in the special figure game using the first special figure is “0” (step S90235; Yes), after performing a predetermined demonstration display setting (step S90250), the special symbol is displayed. Normal processing ends. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 905 is effected from the main board 9011. It is determined whether or not transmission to the substrate 9012 has been completed. At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demonstration display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is terminated.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S90111 of FIG. 32 as the variation pattern setting process. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 38, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S90261). If the big hit flag is on (step S90261; Yes), the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table 90132A shown in FIG. 39A is selected as a use table for determining the fluctuation pattern as one of a plurality of types. Set (step S90262). Further, for example, by reading the big hit type buffer value stored in the RAM 90102, it is specified whether the big hit type is “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change” (step S90263).

  When the jackpot variation pattern determination table 90132A is determined (predetermined) to set the special figure display result to “big hit”, the variation pattern is converted into a random number MR3 ′ for determining the variation pattern according to the determination result of the jackpot type. Is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types. In the big hit variation pattern determination table 90132A, a numerical value (3) to be compared with the random number MR3 ′ for determining the variation pattern, depending on whether the determination result of the big hit type is “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprising change”. Determined value) is a variation pattern PA4′-1, a variation pattern PB4′-1, a variation pattern PB4′-2, a variation pattern PB5′-1 to a variation pattern PB5′-4, and a variation pattern PC1′-1 to a variation pattern. Assigned to one of PC1'-2.

  In the big hit variation pattern determination table 90132A, there is a portion in which the determined value is assigned to each variation pattern so that the ratio determined for each variation pattern varies depending on which of the plurality of types of big hit types is determined. . For example, the variation pattern PA4′-1, the variation pattern PB4′-1, the variation pattern PB4′-2, and the variation pattern PB5′-1 depending on whether the big hit type is “non-probable variation” or “probability variation”. Assignment of the decision value to the variation pattern PB5′-4 is different. Thereby, the ratio determined by the same variation pattern can be varied according to the determination result of whether the jackpot type is a plurality of types.

  Further, in the jackpot variation pattern determination table 90132A, there is a portion in which determined values are assigned to different variation patterns depending on which of a plurality of types of jackpot types is determined. For example, when the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probability change”, the fluctuation pattern PA4′-1, the fluctuation pattern PB4′-1, the fluctuation pattern PB4′-2, and the fluctuation pattern PB5′-1 to the fluctuation pattern PB5. While the decision value is assigned to '-4, the decision value is not assigned to the variation pattern PC1'-1 to the variation pattern PC1'-2. On the other hand, when the big hit type is “surprising”, the decision value is assigned to the variation pattern PC1′-1 to variation pattern PC1′-2, while the variation pattern PA4′-1, No determined value is assigned to the variation pattern PB4′-1, the variation pattern PB4′-2, and the variation pattern PB5′-1 to the variation pattern PB5′-4. Thus, when the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is controlled to the short-term open big hit state according to “surprise”, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be different from the case where the normal open big hit state is controlled. be able to.

  When the big hit type is determined as “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change”, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is a normal state, a probability change state, or a short-time state Thus, the assignment of the decision value to each variation pattern may be made different. Thereby, the ratio determined by the same fluctuation | variation pattern can be varied according to which of a plurality of types of gaming states. Also, depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is a normal state, a probable variation state, or a short-time state when the big hit type is determined as “non-probability variation”, “probability variation”, or “surprise variation” Thus, the determined values may be assigned to different variation patterns. Thereby, it is possible to determine different variation patterns depending on which of the plurality of game states. In this embodiment, when the big hit type is “non-probable change”, more decision values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern PA4′-1 indicating the normal reach fluctuation pattern than in the case of “probability change”. Yes. Therefore, when the reach effect of super reach is executed, the possibility that the jackpot type will be “probability change” is higher than “non-probability change”, so that the player can be expected and Interest can be improved. In addition, in the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table 90132A shown in FIG. 39A, more determination values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern that performs the reach effect of the super reach B than the fluctuation pattern that performs the reach effect of the super reach A. ing.

  When the big hit flag is off in step S90261 shown in FIG. 38 (step S90261; No), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is on (step S90264). If the small hit flag is on (step S90264; Yes), the small hit variation pattern determination table 90132B shown in FIG. To set (step S90265).

  When the small hit flag is OFF in step S90264 (step S90264; No), a loss variation pattern determination table 90132C shown in FIG. 39C is used as a use table for determining one of a plurality of variation patterns. Select and set (step S90267). For example, by determining whether or not the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 90102 is turned on, it is specified whether or not the time reduction control in which the time reduction control is performed in the gaming state is the probability change state or the time reduction state (step S90268). ).

  The loss variation pattern determination table 90132C, when it is determined (preliminary determination) that the special figure display result is “lost”, the variation pattern is selected from among a plurality of types based on the random value MR3 ′ for variation pattern determination. It is a table that is referred to to determine either.

  In the loss variation pattern determination table 90132C, the determined values are changed so that the ratio determined for each variation pattern varies depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state or the time variation control is being performed in the probability variation state or the short time state. There is a part assigned to the pattern. Thereby, the ratio determined to the same variation pattern can be varied depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state or the time-varying control is being performed in the probability variation state or the time-short state. In the loss variation pattern determination table 90132C, there are portions in which determination values are assigned to different variation patterns depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state or the time variation control is being performed in the probability variation state or the short time state. As a result, different variation patterns can be determined depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state, the time-varying control or the time-shortening control in the time-shortening state. It should be noted that the loss variation pattern determination table 90132C is more determined than the determination value assigned to the variation pattern for performing the reach of super reach, in contrast to the big hit variation pattern determination table 90132A in FIG. A value is assigned to a non-reach variation pattern. Therefore, when the reach effect of super reach is executed, the expectation level that is a big hit is high. Further, in the loss variation pattern determination table 90132C, in contrast to the big hit variation pattern determination table 90132A in FIG. 39 (A), the variation in which the reach effect of the super reach B is performed rather than the variation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach A is performed. The decision values are assigned so that there are fewer patterns. Therefore, the super reach B has a higher expectation level that is a big hit when the reach effect is executed than the super reach A. Therefore, the player's attention can be attracted to the type of reach performance to be executed, and the gaming interest can be improved.

  After executing any of the processes of steps S90263, S90265, and S90268 shown in FIG. By referring to the variation pattern determination table set in the table, the variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S90269). Here, in the process of step S90269, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the first special symbol is determined by the first special symbol display device 904A based on the establishment of the first start condition. Regardless of whether the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the second special symbol is determined by the second special symbol display device 904B based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, Using the numerical data indicating the common random value MR3 ′ for determining the variation pattern that is updated by a common random counter or the like, the variation pattern can be determined as one of a plurality of types by the common processing module.

  When the big hit flag is on, the table data corresponding to the big hit type identified by the processing of step S90263 is selected from the table data constituting the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table 90132A, and the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is selected. It is only necessary to be able to determine a variation pattern to which a determination value corresponding to numerical data indicating 'is assigned. In this way, the CPU 90103 only needs to be able to determine any variation pattern from among a plurality of variation patterns prepared in advance corresponding to the determination result of setting the special figure display result to “big hit”.

  When the small hit flag is on, it is only necessary to refer to the small hit variation pattern determination table 90132B and determine a variation pattern to which a determination value corresponding to numerical data indicating the random value MR3 'for variation pattern determination is assigned. In this way, the CPU 90103 only needs to be able to determine the variation pattern prepared in advance corresponding to the determination result of setting the special figure display result to “small hit”.

  When both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off, by determining the variation pattern in the process of step S90269, it is determined whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “reach”. That is, the process of step S90269 includes a process of determining whether or not to change the variable display state of the decorative symbol to the reach state when the variable display result is “losing”.

  After the change pattern is determined in step S90269, a special figure change time which is a variable symbol display time corresponding to the change pattern determination result is set (step S90270). The special figure change time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the change of the special symbol in the special figure game until the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result (special display result) is derived and displayed. It is.

  After executing the process of step S90270, a special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A and a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 904B according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value. Settings for starting the change of the special symbol are performed so as to start any of the special game using the figure (step S90271). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “1”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “2”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 904B is performed.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S90271, settings are made to transmit various commands for starting the change of the special symbol (step S90272). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 90103 performs a gaming state designation command, a first variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012. A transmission provided in the RAM 90102 for setting data indicating a storage address (first address) in the ROM 90101 of the first variation start command table prepared in advance in order to sequentially transmit the notification command and the first pending storage number notification command. Store in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the command buffer. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 90103 sends a game state designation command, a second variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012. In order to sequentially transmit the notification command and the second pending storage number notification command, setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 90101 of the second variation start command table prepared in advance is designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. Stored in the buffer area.

  Here, the first change start command is a command for designating the start of change in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 904A. The second variation start command is a command for designating the start of variation in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 904B. The variation pattern designation command is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R in the image display device 905 in response to variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a decorative pattern. The variable display result notification command is a command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. The gaming state designation command is a command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  Based on the command transmission setting in step S90272, each time a predetermined command control process is executed after the variation pattern setting process is completed, a game state designation command from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012, the first The variation start command or the second variation start command, the variation pattern designation command, the variable display result notification command, the first reserved memory number notification command, or the second reserved memory number notification command are sequentially transmitted. The order in which these effect control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed. For example, after the variable display result notification command is transmitted first, the first variation start command, the second variation start command, or the variation pattern designation command is transmitted. The game state designation command, the first reserved memory number notification command, or the second reserved memory number notification command may be transmitted in this order.

  Thereafter, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “2” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation processing (step S90273), and then the variation pattern setting processing is terminated.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop process executed in step S90113 of FIG. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 39, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not a special figure confirmation display flag provided in, for example, the RAM 90102 is on (step S90291). Here, the special figure confirmation display flag is set to the ON state by the process of step S90295 described later, corresponding to the fact that the fixed special symbol that is the variable display result in the special figure game is derived and displayed.

  If the special figure fixed display flag is OFF in step S90291 (step S90291; No), settings for deriving and displaying the fixed special symbol are performed (step S90292). At this time, a setting for transmitting a decorative symbol stop command to the effect control board 9012 is performed (step S90293). Also, a predetermined time (for example, 1000 milliseconds) is set as the special figure confirmation display time (step S90294). For example, in the process of step S90294, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the special figure confirmation display time may be set in the game control process timer provided in the RAM 90102. Then, after the special figure confirmation display flag is set to the on state (step S90295), the special symbol stop process is terminated. In this way, after the fixed special symbol is derived and displayed by the process of step S90292, the special symbol process processing corresponding to the occurrence of the timer interrupt is performed until the special symbol fixed display time set in step S90294 elapses. Each time the stop process is executed, it is determined in step S90291 that the special figure confirmation display flag is on.

  If the special figure confirmation display flag is ON in step S90291 (step S90291; Yes), it is determined whether or not the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed (step S90296). For example, in the process of step S90296, the game control process timer value that is the stored value of the game control process timer in which the timer initial value is set by the process of step S90294 is read, and whether or not the timer value becomes “0”. Accordingly, it may be determined whether or not the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed. If the timer value is a value other than “0”, the game control process timer value is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the game control timer interrupt process is executed based on the occurrence of the timer interrupt. That's fine. If the special figure confirmation display time has not elapsed in step S90296 (step S90296; No), the special symbol stop process is terminated to wait until the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed.

  When the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed in step S90296 (step S90296; Yes), after clearing the special figure confirmation display flag and turning it off (step S90297), it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is on. Determination is made (step S90298). At this time, if the big hit flag is on (step S90298; Yes), a predetermined time is set as a big hit start production waiting time (step S90299). Also, a setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 is performed (step S90300). For example, in the process of step S90300, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 90101 of the hit start designation command table prepared in advance for transmitting the hit start designation command corresponding to the big hit type buffer value is transmitted in the transmission command buffer. What is necessary is just to store in the buffer area | region designated with the pointer.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S90300, the big hit flag is cleared and turned off (step S90301). In addition, settings for ending the probability change state and the time reduction state are performed (step S90302). For example, as processing of step S90302, processing for clearing the probability variation flag and the time-short flag to turn it off, processing for clearing the time-count counter for counting the remaining number of special game executed in the high base, etc. May be executed. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “4” which is a value corresponding to the big hit release pre-processing (step S90303), and then the special symbol stop processing is ended.

  If the big hit flag is off in step S90298 (step S90298; No), it is determined whether the small hit flag is on (step S90304). At this time, if the small hit flag is on (step S90304; Yes), a predetermined time is set in advance as a small hit start production waiting time (step S90305). Subsequently, a setting is made to transmit a hit start designation command corresponding to the special figure display result being “small hit” from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 (step S90306). Thereafter, the small hit flag is cleared and turned off (step S90307). Also, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”, which is a value corresponding to the small hit release pre-processing (step S90308).

  If the small hit flag is OFF in step S90304 (step S90304; No), the special figure process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to “0” (step S90309). After executing one of the processes in steps S90308 and S90309, it is determined whether or not the time-shortening control or the high opening control in the high base is to be ended (step S90311). Yes), the time reduction control, the high opening control, and the like are ended, and a setting for transmitting a time reduction end command indicating the end of the time reduction state is performed (step S90312), and the special symbol stop process is ended. On the other hand, when not ending (step S90311; No), the special symbol stop process is ended as it is. For example, in the process of step S90311, when the time reduction flag is on, the time reduction count value which is the stored value of the time reduction count counter is updated by, for example, subtracting one. Then, it is determined whether or not the updated short time count value matches a predetermined short time end determination value (for example, “0” or the like). At this time, if it coincides with the time reduction end determination value, the time reduction control or the high release control in the high base may be ended by clearing the time reduction flag and turning it off. On the other hand, if it does not coincide with the time reduction end determination value, the state of the time reduction flag may be maintained and the special symbol stop process may be ended. It should be noted that even when the gaming state is the probability change state, if the time reduction flag is on, it is determined whether or not the time reduction control is to be ended, and the time reduction control may be ended based on the determination result of the end. Thus, while the time-shortening control is ended, the probability variation control may be continued until the next variable display result becomes “big hit”, or until a predetermined number of special game is executed. As a result, the gaming state can be changed to the latent probability. For the probability change state in which the time reduction flag is on and the probability change flag is on, time reduction control is continuously performed until the next variable display result is “big hit”.

  In the process of step S90311, for example, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the probability variation control end is extracted from a random counter provided in the RAM 90102, and a probability variation control end determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90101 or the like is referred to. Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not the probability variation control is to be terminated, for example, when the number of executions of the special figure game during the probability variation control has reached a predetermined probability variation end determination value. On the other hand, in the process of step S90311, the process for ending the probability variation control may not be executed, and the probability variation control may be continued until the next variable display result becomes “big hit”.

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 9012 will be described.

  In the effect control board 9012, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 90120 is activated to execute the effect control main process shown in FIG. When the effect control main process is started, the effect control CPU 90120 shown in FIG. 41 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S9071), clears the RAM 90122, sets various initial values, and displays the effect control board 9012. Performs register settings for the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S9072). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S9072; No), the process waits.

  On the side of the effect control board 9012, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 9011 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main board 9011 is turned on. When an interruption occurs due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal, the effect control CPU 90120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 90120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a control signal that becomes an effect control command from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015 among the input ports included in the I / O 90125. Capture. The effect control command captured at this time is stored, for example, in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 90122. As an example, when the production control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the production control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on (step S9072; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S9073), and command analysis processing is executed (step S9074). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100 of the main board 9011 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control commands are read. Corresponding settings and controls are performed.

  After executing the command analysis processing in step S9074, it is determined whether or not an abnormal command is received from the main substrate 9011 side (step S9075). The abnormal command is related to winning such as, for example, pretending that the player has won a prize even though he has not actually won a prize (more specifically, a winning to a variable winning device which is not actually opened). This command is transmitted when at least one of a plurality of abnormalities such as an abnormality (winning abnormality) or an abnormality (dish abnormality) caused by the upper and lower plates being filled with game balls is detected. As the abnormal command, a command corresponding to each of a plurality of abnormalities is transmitted from the main board 9011 side. If it is determined that an abnormal command has been received (step S9075; Yes), an abnormality notification process for notifying the player that an abnormality has occurred is executed (step S9076). In the abnormality notification process, for example, a message indicating which type of abnormality has occurred on the image display device, a lamp lighting, or a sound output process may be performed. Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the abnormality notification can be executed at any timing by receiving the abnormality command by the processing of step S9076, and an icon as a specific display is displayed. It is possible to notify the abnormality even within a predetermined period after the notification is made.

  After performing the process of step S9076, or when it is determined in step S9075 that an abnormal command has not been received (step S9075; No), it is determined whether or not an effect setting has been made by the player (step S9077). . In the process of step S9077, for example, it is determined by checking whether or not an effect setting button (not shown) has been operated by the player, by detecting whether or not a sensor that detects the player's operation is detected. When it is determined that the effect setting has been performed (step S9077; Yes), an effect setting process is performed (step S9078). In the process of step S9078, for example, the volume setting of the effect to be executed, the type of the music and background to be output, the brightness setting of the image display device 905, and the game effect lamp, when the effect setting button is operated by the player. Settings relating to effects such as brightness settings of various lamps such as 909 may be changed. In addition, for example, it may be possible to select which effect setting is to be changed from the menu screen, or a different operation is performed according to a change item desired by the player, and the setting corresponding to the operation is changed. You may do it. In addition, although mentioned later in detail, in this embodiment, the setting regarding production can be executed at any timing by the player's operation by the processing of step S9078, and the specific display Settings relating to the effects can be made even within a predetermined period after the notification that the icon is displayed. Specifically, the process of step S9078 can be executed at any timing such as during demonstration display, during variable display, or during control of a big hit game. Note that the process of step S9078 may not be performed during a period (for example, 0.1 second) from the end of variable display to the start of the next variable display. Specifically, the process in step S9078 may be prohibited during a period from the reception of the symbol determination command to the reception of the change start command.

  After performing the process of step S9078 or when it is determined in step S9077 that the effect setting has not been performed (step S9077; No), the effect control process process is executed (step S9079). In the effect control process of step S9079, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 905, a sound output operation from the speakers 908L and 908R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitter such as a game effect lamp 909 and a decorative LED, With respect to the control contents of the rendering operation using various rendering devices such as the driving operation in the rendering model, determination, determination, setting, etc. according to the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 9011 are performed.

  Following the effect control process, an effect random number update process is executed (step S9080), and numerical data indicating the effect random number counted by the random counter in the RAM 90122 is obtained by software as various random values used for effect control. Update. Thereafter, the process returns to step S9072.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process performed in step S9079 of FIG. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 42, the effect control CPU 90120 selects and executes one of the following processes in steps S90170 to S90177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 90122, for example. To do.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S90170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. This variable display start waiting process determines whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 905 based on whether the first variation start command or the second variation start command from the main board 9011 is received. The process etc. which determine are included.

  The variable display start setting process in step S90171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. The variable display start setting process corresponds to the start of variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B, and the decorative symbols in the image display device 905. In order to perform variable display execution settings and other various effects, it includes a process for determining a definite decorative pattern and various effect control patterns according to the variation pattern of the special symbol and the type of display result. . In addition, in the variable display start setting process, an advantageous state such as a specific display effect execution setting in which a special image such as an icon as a specific display is displayed step by step, a cut-in notice, a step-up notice, etc. Execution setting of the notice effect as an effect suggesting that the control is performed is performed. It should be noted that the degree of advantage for the player is, for example, a state that is actually advantageous for the player when a certain event occurs (a state where a privilege is granted or granted, or a state where the rate of privilege grant is high) , An advantageous state that is different from a privilege), or a proportion of an advantageous state. Further, the privilege indicated that the possibility of granting is high due to the special mode may be the same as the target of the advantage for the player (advantageous state), and is different from the target of the advantage for the player. It may be a thing. In addition, the specific display effect in this embodiment indicates that a special image such as an icon as the specific display is displayed stepwise according to the degree of advantage. For example, the specific display is a variable display. Display (active display) or meter display corresponding to the display, and various types of effects such as those that change the display mode of the active display step by step, and those that increase the meter display step by step It may be. That is, in the concept of step change of specific display, special images such as icons are displayed step by step, the mode of active display changes step by step, and meter display increases (or decreases). For example.

  The variable display effect process in step S90172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the effect processing during variable display, the effect control CPU 90120 reads various control data from the effect control pattern corresponding to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the RAM 90122, and performs various operations during variable display of the decorative design. The production control is performed. In the variable display effect processing, a specific display effect or a notice effect is executed. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the special symbol variation effect control pattern, or a symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 9011 is received. Corresponding to the above, the final decorative symbol as the final stop symbol that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is displayed in a completely stopped manner. If the final decorative design is displayed in a complete stop in response to the end code being read from the special pattern variation production control pattern, the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is displayed. Even if it does not depend on the effect control command from the main board 9011, the determined decorative design can be derived and displayed autonomously on the effect control board 9012 side, and the variable display result can be determined. When the finalized decorative symbol is displayed as a complete stop, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special figure waiting process in step S90173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special chart waiting process, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not a hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 has been received. When the hit start specifying command is received and the hit start specifying command specifies the start of the big hit gaming state, the value of the effect process flag is “6” corresponding to the big hit effect processing. Update to On the other hand, when the hit start designation command is received and the hit start designation command designates the start of the small hit gaming state, the value of the production process flag is a value corresponding to the small hit medium production process. To “4”. When the production control process timer times out without receiving a hit start designation command, it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is “lost”, and the value of the production process flag is the initial value. Update to “0”. In addition, the waiting process per special figure in step S90173 includes a process of performing execution setting of the above-mentioned jackpot promotion effect when the hitting start designation command specifies the start of the big hit gaming state except “surprise”. ing.

  The small hitting effect process in step S90174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In the small hit effect processing, the effect control CPU 90120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the small hit gaming state, and displays an effect image based on the set content on the display screen of the image display device 905. Or by outputting a sound or sound effect from the speakers 908L and 908R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 9013, or a game effect lamp 909 by outputting a command (electric decoration signal) to the lamp control board 9014. Various effect control in the small hit gaming state such as lighting / extinguishing / flashing the decoration LED is executed. Also, in the small hitting effect process, for example, in response to receiving a hit end designation command from the main board 9011, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5” which is a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. .

  The small hit end effect process in step S90175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 90120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit gaming state, and displays an effect image based on the set content on the display screen of the image display device 905. Or by outputting a sound or sound effect from the speakers 908L and 908R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 9013, or a game effect lamp 909 by outputting a command (electric decoration signal) to the lamp control board 9014. Various effect controls are executed at the end of the small hit gaming state, such as turning on / off / flashing the decoration LED. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value.

  The big hit effect process in step S90176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this jackpot effect processing, the effect control CPU 90120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit gaming state, and displays an effect image based on the set content on the display screen of the image display device 905. In addition, a sound or sound effect is output from the speakers 908L and 908R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 9013, and a game effect lamp 909 or decoration is output by outputting a command (electric decoration signal) to the lamp control board 9014. Various effect control in the big hit gaming state such as lighting / extinguishing / flashing the LED for the game is executed. Further, in the big hit effect processing, control for executing the big hit promotion effect and the notification effect is performed. Further, in the big hit effect process, for example, in response to receiving a hit end designation command from the main board 9011, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to “7” which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process.

  The ending effect process in step S90177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 90120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state, and displays an effect image based on the set content on the display screen of the image display device 905. The sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 908L and 908R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 9013. Various effect controls such as turning on / off / flashing the LED are executed at the end of the big hit gaming state.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S90171 of FIG. 42 as variable display start setting processing. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 42, the effect control CPU 90120 first reads the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 9011, for example, and the special figure display result is “lost”. It is determined whether or not (step S90551). When it is determined that the special figure display result is “losing” (step S90551; Yes), for example, by reading the EXT data in the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 9011, the designated variation pattern is obtained. Is determined to be a non-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach” (step S90552).

  If it is determined in step S90552 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S90552; Yes), a combination of a confirmed decorative symbol that is a final stop symbol constituting a non-reach combination is determined (step S90553). As an example, in the process of step S90553, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the left determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 90122 is extracted, and a predetermined left determined in advance stored in the ROM 90121 or the like. By referring to the symbol determination table or the like, the left fixed decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 905L in the display area of the image display device 905 is determined among the fixed decorative symbols. Next, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the right determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 90122 is extracted, and a predetermined right determined symbol determining table stored in advance in the ROM 90121 or the like is referred to. As a result, the right determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 905R in the display area of the image display device 905 is determined from the determined decorative symbols. At this time, the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol may be determined so as to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined symbol determining table or the like. Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a medium fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 90122 is extracted, and a predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90121 or the like is referred to. Thus, among the determined decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 905C in the display area of the image display device 905 is determined.

  If it is determined in step S90552 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S90552; No), the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that are the final stop symbols constituting the reach combination is determined (step S90554). As an example, in the process of step S90554, first, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the left and right determined symbols updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 90122 is extracted, and predetermined left and right determined in advance stored in the ROM 90121 or the like. By referring to the symbol determination table, the symbol numbers that are stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” ornament symbol display areas 905L and 905R in the display area of the image display device 905 are the same among the confirmed ornament symbols. Determine the decorative pattern. Further, by extracting numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a medium fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 90122, and referring to a predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90121, etc. Then, among the determined decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 905C in the display area of the image display device 905 is determined. Here, for example, in the case where the confirmed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, such as when the symbol number of the middle confirmed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol, an arbitrary value (For example, “1”) may be added to or subtracted from the symbol number of the medium-decorated decorative symbol so that the finalized decorative symbol is not the jackpot combination but the reach combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium-decorated decorative symbol, the difference (design difference) between the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-decorated decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. .

  When it is determined in step S90551 that the special figure display result is not “losing” (step S90551; No), it is determined whether the special figure display result is “small hit” or “surprise” (step S90555). ). When it is determined that the position is “small hit” or “accuracy” (step S90555; Yes), for example, a chance to open the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol corresponding to the case of “small hit” or “accuracy”. A combination is determined (step S90557). As an example, corresponding to the case where any one of the variation patterns PC1′-1 to PC1′-3 is designated by the variation pattern designation command, a final stop symbol constituting any one of a plurality of types of opening chances and The combination of the determined decorative design is determined. In this case, numerical data indicating a random number for chance determination that is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 90122 is extracted, and a predetermined chance determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90121 or the like is referred to. Thus, it is only necessary to determine the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols constituting any of the opening chance eyes.

  When it is determined in step S525 that it is “non-probability change” or “probability change” other than “small hit” (step S90555; Yes), the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that are the final stop symbols constituting the big hit combination is determined. (Step S90556). As an example, in the process of step S90556, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the big hit determination symbol updated by a random counter or the like of the RAM 90122 is extracted, and then a predetermined big hit determination symbol stored in advance in the ROM 90121 or the like. By referring to the determination table, the symbol numbers that are stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R on the screen of the image display device 905 are the same. Determine the decorative pattern.

  As a specific example, regardless of whether the jackpot type is “non-probability change” or “probability change”, in the process of step S90556, any one of a plurality of types of normal symbols or probability change symbols is selected. What is necessary is just to select and to determine the definite ornament symbol which comprises a jackpot combination.

  After executing any one of steps S90553, S90554, S90556, and S90557, the effect control CPU 90120 sets execution of a specific display effect in which a special image such as an icon is displayed step by step according to the degree of advantage. A specific display effect execution setting process is performed for performing (Step S90559).

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the specific display effect execution setting process performed in step S90559 of FIG. In the specific display effect execution setting process shown in FIG. 44, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether or not to execute the specific display effect (step S90601). Specifically, in the process of step S90601, whether or not to execute the specific display effect is determined with reference to the specific display effect execution determination table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 45A is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the specific display effect execution determination table. In this embodiment, whether or not to execute the specific display effect is set to the determination ratio illustrated in accordance with the variable display result. Specifically, the determination ratio is set so that the ratio in which the variable display result is “big hit” is higher in the case of executing the specific display effect than in the case of not executing the specific display effect. Therefore, it is possible to gather the player's attention on whether or not the specific display effect is executed. For example, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the determination ratio differs depending on whether it is a super reach big hit or a normal reach big hit. When the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”, the determination rate may be further varied according to the variation pattern.

  Returning to FIG. 44, after executing the processing of step S90601, the CPU 90120 for effect control determines whether or not it is determined to execute the specific display effect in step S90601 (step S90602). When it is determined not to execute the specific display effect (step S90602; No), the effect control CPU 90120 ends the specific display effect execution setting process. On the other hand, when it is determined to execute the specific display effect (step S90602; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 determines the execution mode of the specific display effect (step S90603). Specifically, in the process of step S90603, the execution mode of the specific display effect is determined as one of a plurality of modes with reference to the specific display effect execution mode determination table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 45B is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the specific display effect execution mode determination table. In this embodiment, in this embodiment, as shown in the figure, the types of specific display effects such as “Pattern A”, “Pattern B”, and “Pattern C” are set. Accordingly, the determination ratio is set as shown. Specifically, the “pattern A” mode is a mode in which a star-shaped icon is displayed, and the “pattern B” mode is a mode in which a star-shaped icon and a triangular icon are displayed. The mode “C” is a mode in which a star icon, a triangle icon, and a round icon are displayed. In the specific display effect execution mode determination table in this embodiment, as shown in the figure, the “pattern B” mode is more preferable than the “pattern B” mode than the “pattern B” mode. The determination ratio is set so that the ratio that the variable display result becomes “big hit” when executed is higher (that is, the percentage that “big hit” is displayed when more icons are displayed) Is set to be high). Therefore, the development destination of the production differs depending on which icon is displayed, and it is possible to attract the player's attention to which icon is displayed. In the illustrated example, three types of patterns “Pattern A” to “Pattern C” are shown. However, there may be a mode in which only a triangular icon is displayed or a mode in which only a round icon is displayed. Good. Further, in this embodiment, an example is shown in which the number of executions of the specific display effect is 1 (only the presence / absence of execution is determined in step S90601 in FIG. 44), but the specific display effect is executed a plurality of times. (The higher the number of executions, the higher the ratio of “big hit” may be.) In that case, one type of icon may be displayed each time it is executed (FIG. 44). The number of executions is also determined in step S90601, and the variation pattern and the mode corresponding to the number of times may be determined in the process of step S90603). Furthermore, even if the number of icons to be displayed is the same, the ratio of “big hit” may be different depending on the combination of icons to be displayed (that is, the icons to be displayed according to the variable display result). Combinations may be determined at different rates).

  Returning to FIG. 44, after performing the process of step S90603, the CPU 90120 for effect control does not perform the pseudo-continuous variation and performs only the pseudo-continuous variation pattern (PB3′-1, PB3 shown in FIG. 30). It is determined by confirming the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 side (step S90604). If it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is not a pseudo-continuous fluctuation pattern (step S90604; No), that is, if it is a fluctuation pattern that performs pseudo-continuous fluctuation or is not a pseudo-continuous fluctuation pattern, an execution timing determination table shown in FIG. 1 is performed to determine the execution timing of the specific display effect (step S90605), and the specific display effect execution setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation pattern is a pseudo-continuous variation (step S90604; Yes), the execution timing of the specific display effect is determined with reference to the execution timing determination table 2 shown in FIG. 46B (step S90606). Then, the specific display effect execution setting process ends. As described above, in this embodiment, for ease of understanding, a maximum of one quasi-continuous variation is performed (one re-variation). The number of times of pseudo-continuous variation in the case may be such that it can be executed more than once, for example, 2 times or 3 times. In that case, in step S90604 in FIG. If it is determined whether or not an effect is performed and the failure effect is executed, the timing at which the execution period of the failure effect and the execution period of the specific display effect are not overlapped is determined as the execution timing of the specific display effect. Good (the execution timing may be determined with reference to an execution timing determination table in which the superimposition timing cannot be selected).

  FIG. 46 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of an execution timing determination table referred to for determining the execution timing of the specific display effect. FIG. 46A shows a configuration example of the execution timing determination table 1 that is referred to when the fluctuation pattern is a pseudo-continuous fluctuation pattern or not a pseudo-continuous fluctuation pattern, and FIG. 4 shows a configuration example of an execution timing determination table 2 that is referred to in the case of a pseudo-continuous fluctuation pattern. In the execution timing determination table 1 shown in FIG. 46A, three types of timings “timing 1” to “timing 3” are set as the determination timing, and are set to the illustrated determination ratio. Note that “timing 1” to “timing 3” shown in FIG. 46A are execution timings set in advance according to the variation pattern. For example, even when the execution timing is the same “timing 2”, the timing varies. The timing is different for each pattern. All the execution timings of “timing 1” to “timing 3” may be different timings according to the variation pattern. For example, the execution timing of “timing 1” may be a common execution timing regardless of the variation pattern. Good. On the other hand, in the execution timing determination table 2 shown in FIG. 46B, two types of timings “timing 1” and “timing 3” are set as the determination timings, and are set to the illustrated determination ratios. . As will be described in detail later, the execution timing of “timing 2” is set to an execution timing in which the execution period of the pseudo-joint effect and the execution period of the specific display effect overlap, and other “timing 1” and “ The execution timing of “timing 3” is set to an execution timing at which the execution period of the pseudo-joint effect and the execution period of the specific display effect do not overlap (see FIG. 48). In the illustrated example, three types of timings “timing 1” to “timing 3” are set, but more types of execution timings may be set in each of the execution timing determination tables. .

  Here, the specific display effect and the execution timing thereof will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48. FIG. 47 is a timing chart showing details of the specific display effect. As shown in FIG. 47, when the specific display effect is started, a predetermined effect as a mini game is performed. The predetermined effect is, for example, an effect (see FIGS. 54B to 54E) that suggests whether to display an icon as a specific display, and is specified when the result of the predetermined effect indicates success. The specific display change notification for notifying that the icon as the display is displayed is continuously performed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), and then the icon is displayed in the mode determined in step S90603 of FIG. (The specific display changes). Then, the specific display effect ends. In this embodiment, the specific display change notification is continuously performed for a predetermined period, and then the specific display is changed. However, the specific display change notification is continuously performed for the predetermined period of 10 seconds described above. For example, it may be performed continuously for 6 seconds, and the specific display change notification may not be performed for the remaining 4 seconds. That is, in this embodiment, the execution of the failure effect or the notice effect is restricted for a predetermined period after the notification that the icon is displayed, but the specific display change notification is continuously executed during the predetermined period. For example, it may be a period of production or a period counted by a timer such as 10 seconds. In addition, the example shown in FIG. 47 shows a case where the effect result of the predetermined effect indicates success (in this embodiment, for the sake of easy understanding, the effect result of the predetermined effect always indicates success). However, there may be a case where the effect result of the predetermined effect indicates failure. In this case, the specific display change notification is not performed (the icon is not displayed), and the specific display effect is finished as it is. Good. The process of step S90601 in FIG. 44 determines whether or not to execute such a specific display effect. In addition, in the case where the effect result of the predetermined effect indicates failure, it is only necessary to select a mode for executing the predetermined effect indicating failure in the process of step S90603 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 48 is a timing chart showing the execution timing of the specific display effect. FIG. 48A shows the execution timing of the specific display effect in the case of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation pattern, and FIG. 48B shows the case of the fluctuation pattern other than the pseudo-continuous fluctuation, where the pseudo-continuous fluctuation occurs. The execution timing of the specific display effect at the time of the variation pattern to be performed is shown. FIG. 48C shows the case of a variation pattern other than the pseudo-continuous pattern, and specifically shows the execution timing of the specific display effect in the case of the non-reach loss variation pattern. In the illustrated example, the variation pattern of non-reach loss is shown, and the illustration of other variation patterns is omitted. However, in the case of other variation patterns, as described above, “ Timing 1 ”to“ timing 3 ”are set in advance. As shown in FIG. 48 (A), in the case of the pseudo-continuous change pattern, the pseudo-continuous effect to be executed is a failure effect. As described above, in the specific display effect, after a result indicating success as the effect result of the predetermined effect is displayed, the specific display change notification for notifying that the icon as the specific display is displayed continues for a predetermined period. It is suggested that it is advantageous for the player. Nevertheless, if a failure production is subsequently performed as a pseudo-continuous production, the player will be discouraged and the gaming interest will be reduced. Therefore, as shown in the figure, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the pseudo-continuous pattern, execution of “timing 2” in which the execution period of the pseudo-continuous effect and the execution period of the specific display effect are superimposed as the execution timing of the specific display effect. Timing cannot be selected. Therefore, in the process of step S90606 in FIG. 44, the execution timing of the specific display effect is determined with reference to the execution timing determination table 2 shown in FIG. doing. As a result, the execution of the failure effect is restricted in a predetermined period after it is notified that the icon as the specific display is displayed, and a decrease in the game entertainment is prevented. In addition, when determining the execution timing when the specific display effect is executed a plurality of times with the fluctuation pattern of the pseudo-continuous gaze, a plurality of timings are selected from the execution timings other than “timing 2” in the process of step S90606 in FIG. do it. In addition, when the effect result of the predetermined effect in the specific display effect indicates failure, since the situation as described above does not occur, the execution timing of “timing 2” may be selectable (FIG. 48B described later). the same as). On the other hand, even when the result of the predetermined effect in the specific display effect indicates a failure, the execution timing of “Timing 2” is made unselectable, and it is notified that the icon is not displayed (the predetermined effect as a mini game). It may be possible to prevent the failure effect from being performed during a predetermined period of time after the result of (1) is unsuccessful. According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged when the result of the predetermined effect ends in failure and the failure effect is further executed. Further, in this embodiment, it is informed that the execution timing at which the execution period of the pseudo-joint effect (failure effect) and the execution period of the specific display effect overlap cannot be selected, and the icon as the specific display is displayed. Although the example of prohibiting the execution of the failure effect during the predetermined period after the display is shown, the execution timing at which the execution period of the pseudo continuous effect (failure effect) and the execution period of the specific display effect may be selected may be selectable. In that case, the failure effect may be executed in a manner that is difficult for the player to recognize, such as a smaller display than normal, or a transparent display. Further, the execution timing at which the execution period of the pseudo-joint effect (failure effect) and the execution period of the specific display effect overlap is not made unselectable, and is determined to be, for example, a determination ratio of 1% or 2%. You may restrict | limit a ratio by making it extremely low compared with the case where failure production is not performed. That is, the restriction of execution of the failure effect includes not only the case where it is not executed, but also the case where it is executed in a manner that is difficult for the player to recognize, or the case where it is executed at an extremely low rate. In addition, when the execution timing of “timing 2” in which the execution period of the pseudo-joint effect and the execution period of the specific display effect are superimposed can be selected, and “timing 2” is determined, “timing 2” and “ By performing a process of shifting the execution timing of the specific display effect at a timing such as “timing 2.5” which is the execution timing between “timing 3”, it is simulated after the notification that the icon as the specific display is displayed. You may restrict | limit that a failure production is performed as a continuous production.

  Also, for example, when the execution timing of the specific display effect is determined as “timing 1” as shown in FIG. 48A, the failure effect is subsequently performed as a pseudo-joint effect after a certain period of time has elapsed. Therefore, the disappointment of the player can be alleviated to some extent. However, in order to prevent the player from becoming more discouraged, in the case of the pseudo-continuous change pattern, “timing 1” and “timing 2” cannot be selected, that is, before the execution period of the pseudo-joint effect. The set timing may not be selectable (the failure effect is also limited during the period after the icon as the specific display is displayed). According to this, since the execution of the failure effect is restricted after it is notified that the icon as the specific display is displayed, it is possible to further prevent the game entertainment from deteriorating. While “timing 2” cannot be selected, the determination ratio determined as “timing 1” may be an extremely low determination ratio such as 1% or 2%.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 48B, in the case of a variation pattern that performs pseudo continuous variation, the pseudo continuous effect is a successful effect. Therefore, the specific display change notification is continuously performed for a predetermined period, and it is suggested that the player will be discouraged by executing the failure effect after it is suggested that the player is advantageous. Therefore, as shown in the drawing, the execution timing of “timing 2” in which the execution period of the pseudo-joint effect and the execution period of the specific display effect are superimposed can be selected as the execution timing of the specific display effect. That is, in the process of step S90605 of FIG. 44, the execution timing of the specific display effect is determined with reference to the execution timing determination table 1 shown in FIG. 46A including the execution timing of “timing 2”. Further, as shown in FIG. 48C, similarly in the case of the non-reach fluctuation pattern, the processing in step S90605 in FIG. 44 includes the execution timing of “timing 2” as shown in FIG. Although the execution timing of the specific display effect is determined with reference to the execution timing determination table 1, the execution timing of “timing 1” is compared with the case of the variation pattern that performs pseudo continuous variation shown in FIG. However, the execution timings of “timing 2” and “timing 3” are different, although the timing is the same (for example, the timing 2 seconds after the start of variable display). In this way, by providing an execution timing different from the common execution timing in accordance with the variation pattern, it is possible to enhance the effect. Note that, as shown in FIG. 48C, the specific display effect can be executed even in the case of a fluctuation pattern that performs pseudo-continuous fluctuation and a fluctuation pattern of pseudo-continuous fluctuation. According to this, since the pseudo-joint effect is not executed in the predetermined period after it is notified that the icon as the specific display is displayed, it is possible to prevent a decrease in game entertainment. When the execution timing is determined when the specific display effect is executed a plurality of times with a variation pattern that performs pseudo-continuous variation (with a variation pattern other than the pseudo-continuous variation), “timing 1” is performed in step S90605 of FIG. A plurality of timings may be selected from all execution timings from “timing 3”. In addition, in the example shown in FIGS. 48A and 48B (the same applies to a variation pattern that reaches instead of a pseudo-variation variation pattern), the execution timing of the specific display effect is set as the timing before reach. The specific display effect may be executed inside. Note that the pseudo continuous variation may be one or more times, one specific display effect may be performed for one variation including the first variation, or in one variation including the first variation. Multiple specific display effects may be performed. In addition, when a plurality of specific display effects are performed, icons displayed in stages are increased (for example, when a total of three specific display effects are performed, one icon is displayed in one specific display effect). Display, and finally three icons are displayed).

  Returning to FIG. 43, after executing the specific display effect execution setting process in step S90559, the effect control CPU 90120 provides a notice such as a cut-in notice or a step-up notice for notifying whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”. A notice effect execution setting process for effect execution setting is performed (step S90560).

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the notice effect execution setting process performed in step S90560 of FIG. In the notice effect execution setting process shown in FIG. 49, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether or not the notice effect is executed (step S90901). Specifically, in the process of step S90901, the presence / absence of the notice effect is determined with reference to the notice effect execution determination table shown in FIG. In this embodiment, in order to simplify the explanation and facilitate understanding, the cut-in notice is executed as the notice effect. However, other kinds of notice effects may be executed, It is assumed that different types of notice effects may be executed according to the variable display result.

  FIG. 50 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a notice effect execution determination table. In this embodiment, whether or not to execute the notice effect is set to the determination ratio illustrated in accordance with the variable display result. Specifically, the determination ratio is set so that the ratio in which the variable display result is “big hit” is higher in the case where the notice effect is executed than in the case where the notice effect is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to collect the player's attention as to whether or not the notice effect is executed.

  Returning to FIG. 49, after performing the process of step S90901, the CPU 90120 for effect control determines whether or not it is determined to execute the notice effect in step S90901 (step S90902). When it is determined not to execute the notice effect (step S90902; No), the effect control CPU 90120 ends the notice effect execution setting process. On the other hand, when it is determined to execute the notice effect (step S90602; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the specific display effect execution setting has been made in the specific display effect execution setting process in step S90560 of FIG. (Step S90904). When it is determined that the execution setting for the specific display effect is not made (step S90904; No), the execution timing of the notice effect is determined with reference to the execution timing determination table A shown in FIG. The setting process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the execution setting for the specific display effect is made (step S90904; Yes), any one of the execution timing determination table B to the execution timing determination table D shown in FIGS. Is determined according to the execution timing of the specific display effect, and the execution timing of the notice effect is determined. Then, the notice effect execution setting process ends.

  FIG. 51 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of an execution timing determination table referred to for determining the execution timing of the notice effect. FIG. 51A shows a configuration example of the execution timing determination table A that is referred to when the specific display effect is not executed. In the execution timing determination table A shown in FIG. 51A, four types of timings “timing A” to “timing D” are set, and are set to the illustrated determination ratio. 51 (B) to 51 (D) show configuration examples of an execution timing determination table B to an execution timing determination table D that are referred to when a specific display effect is executed. Specifically, the execution timing determination table B is a table that is referred to when the specific display effect is executed at the timing “timing 1”, and the execution timing determination table C has the specific display effect “timing 2”. The execution timing determination table D is a table that is referred to when the specific display effect is executed at the timing “timing 3”. In the execution timing determination table B to the execution timing determination table D, the execution timing of the notice effect is set so that the timing at which the execution period of the specific display effect and the execution period of the notice effect are superimposed cannot be selected (FIG. 52). reference). In the illustrated example, four types of timings “timing A” to “timing D” are set, but more types of execution timings may be set in each of the execution timing determination tables. . In the illustrated example, the execution timing is determined regardless of the variable display result. For example, the variable display is performed so that the rate at which the variable display result becomes “big hit” increases as the execution timing is delayed. The execution timing determined according to the result may be different (in contrast, the earlier the execution timing, the higher the ratio of “big hit” may be). According to this, a player's attention can be gathered also about the timing at which a notice effect is performed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 51, an example is shown in which the respective tables of the execution timing determination table B to the execution timing determination table D are prepared in advance according to the execution timing of the specific display effect. 49 is created in the process of step S90906 in FIG. 49, and the execution timing is determined from the execution timing determination table A shown in FIG. It may be. According to this, the capacity can be reduced.

  Next, the execution timing of the specific display effect and the notice effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a timing chart showing the execution timing of the notice effect when the specific display effect is executed. In the case where the specific display effect is not executed, any execution timing may be determined from all the execution timings “timing A” to “timing D” illustrated (see FIG. 51A). Also, the timing of “X” shown in FIG. 52 shows an example in the case where an error occurs at the timing or an effect is set by the player, and the description here is omitted. Note that the case where an error occurs at the timing of “X” and the case where the player makes an effect setting will be described later. In addition, as described above, even when the specific display effect is executed, if the effect result of the predetermined effect as the mini game indicates failure, the specific display change notification is not performed (the icon is not displayed). ) Since the specific display effect ends as it is, the execution timing of the notice effect may be determined from any of the execution timings “timing A” to “timing D”.

  Specifically, FIG. 52A is a timing chart showing the execution timing of the notice effect when the specific display effect is executed at “timing 1” in FIG. 46 (see FIG. 48). As shown in the figure, when the specific display effect is executed at “timing 1”, any timing from “timing B” to “timing D” other than “timing A” is determined as the execution timing of the notice effect (“ Timing A "cannot be selected). That is, the CPU 90120 for effect control determines the execution timing of the notice effect with reference to the execution timing determination table B shown in FIG. 51B in the process of step S90906 of FIG. In the example shown in the figure, the execution timing of “timing B” is a timing at which the execution period of the pseudo-joint effect and the execution period of the notice effect are superimposed, and “timing B” is also selected as the execution timing of the notice effect. In this case, the execution timing of “timing B” may not be selectable. According to this, a player's attention to each production can be collected. In the example shown in FIG. 52A, an example in which a failure effect is executed as a pseudo-joint effect is shown, but the same applies to a case where a success effect is executed. Similarly to determining the execution timing of the specific display effect, “timing B” can be selected as the execution timing of the notice effect when executing the success effect, and “timing B” when executing the failure effect. "Cannot be selected" (when the timing at which the execution period of the pseudo-joint effect and the execution period of the notice effect are superimposed is determined as the execution timing, it may be determined in the same manner as in the case of the specific display effect) .

  FIG. 52B is a timing chart showing the execution timing of the notice effect when the specific display effect is executed at “timing 2” in FIG. 46 (see FIG. 48). As shown in the drawing, when the specific display effect is executed at “timing 2”, any timing of “timing A”, “timing C” and “timing D” other than “timing B” is set as the execution timing of the notice effect. ("Timing B" cannot be selected). That is, the CPU 90120 for effect control determines the execution timing of the notice effect with reference to the execution timing determination table C shown in FIG. 51C in the process of step S90906 of FIG. In the illustrated example, the end timing of the specific display effect and the end timing of the pseudo-joint effect are the same timing, but this is an example, and different timings may be used.

  FIG. 52C is a timing chart showing the execution timing of the notice effect when the specific display effect is executed at “timing 3” in FIG. 46 (see FIG. 48). As shown in the drawing, when the specific display effect is executed at “timing 3”, any timing of “timing A”, “timing B” and “timing D” other than “timing C” is set as the execution timing of the notice effect. ("Timing C" cannot be selected). That is, the CPU 90120 for effect control determines the execution timing of the notice effect with reference to the execution timing determination table D shown in FIG. 51 (D) in the process of step S90906 of FIG. As shown in FIG. 52, the execution timing of “timing D” is set as an execution timing at which the execution period of the specific display effect and the execution period of the notice effect do not overlap. That is, the execution timing of “timing D” is an execution timing that can be selected in common regardless of the execution timing of the specific display effect. Therefore, when the notice effect is executed at a timing according to the execution timing of the specific display effect, and when the notice effect is executed regardless of the execution timing of the specific display effect (and even when the specific display effect is not executed), the notice is given at a common timing. There is a case where an effect is executed, and the range of the effect can be widened.

  As described above, in the specific display effect, after a result indicating success as the effect result of the predetermined effect is displayed, the specific display change notification for notifying that the icon as the specific display is displayed continues for a predetermined period. It is suggested that it is advantageous for the player. Nevertheless, if the notice effect is executed within a predetermined period from when the icon is displayed until the icon is displayed (specific display changes), the effect of the specific display effect is reduced. End up. Therefore, as illustrated, the timing at which the execution period of the specific display effect and the execution period of the notice effect are not superimposed is determined as the execution timing of the notice effect. This restricts execution of the notice effect within a predetermined period after the notification that the icon is displayed, thereby preventing the effect from being reduced. In this embodiment, the execution timing at which the execution period of the specific display effect and the execution period of the notice effect are superimposed is not selectable, and a predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the specific display is displayed is displayed. Although the example of prohibiting the execution of the notice effect is shown, it may be possible to select the execution timing at which the execution period of the specific display effect and the execution period of the notice effect are superimposed. The notice effect may be executed in a manner that is difficult for the player to recognize, such as a transparent display. That is, the restriction on the execution of the notice effect includes not only the case where it is not executed but also the case where it is executed in a manner that is difficult for the player to recognize. In addition, as described above, even when the specific display effect is executed, if the effect result of the predetermined effect as the mini game indicates failure, the specific display change notification is not performed (the icon is not displayed). ) Since the specific display effect is finished as it is, an event that the effect of the specific display effect is reduced does not occur. Therefore, in this case, the execution timing at which the execution period of the specific display effect and the execution period of the notice effect are superimposed does not have to be unselectable (it is not necessary to limit the execution of the notice effect).

  Returning to FIG. 43, after executing the notice effect execution setting process in step S90560, the effect control CPU 90120 executes other effects such as an effect asking whether or not to reach or a chance up notice performed in the reach state. Whether or not to perform and other effect settings for determining the type of effect to be executed are made, and an effect control pattern to be used is selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step S90561). The CPU 90120 for effect control corresponds to, for example, a plurality of patterns prepared and stored in advance in the ROM 90121 corresponding to the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command, the specific display effect or the notice effect determined in steps S90559 and S90560, and the like. Any one of the production control patterns may be selected and set as a use pattern. Subsequently, for example, an initial value of an effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area (such as an effect control timer setting unit) of the RAM 90122 is set corresponding to the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command (step S90562).

  Then, the setting for starting the variation of the decorative design or the like in the image display device 905 is performed (step S90563). At this time, for example, the display control command designated by the display control data included in the effect control pattern determined as the use pattern in step S90561 is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 90123. The variation of the decorative symbols may be started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R provided in the display area. After executing the process of step S90563, the effect control CPU 90120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S90564), and then the variable display start setting process. Exit.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing executed in step S90172 of FIG. 42 as the variable display effect processing. When the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 53 is started, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether or not the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern has passed, based on the timer value of the effect control process timer. (Step S90801). The effect control CPU 90120 updates, for example, the timer value of the effect control process timer (for example, 1 subtraction), and when an end code is read from the effect control pattern corresponding to the updated effect control process timer value. In addition, it may be determined that the variable display time has elapsed.

  When it is determined in step S90801 that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S90801; No), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether it is the specific display effect period in which the specific display effect is executed (step S90802). ). If the specific display effect period is determined in advance in the effect control pattern determined in the process of step S90561 in accordance with the determination of the presence / absence and timing of execution of the specific display effect in the process of step S90559 of FIG. Good.

  When it is determined that it is the specific display effect period (step S90802; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 executes the effect control of the specific display effect (step S90803). Thereby, the specific display effect is executed. Specifically, in the process of step S90803, as described above, a specific effect as a mini-game is performed, and after indicating success as an effect result of the predetermined effect, a specification for notifying that an icon as a specific display is displayed. The display change notification is continuously performed for a predetermined period, and then the icon of the aspect determined in step S90603 in FIG. 44 is displayed (specific display changes). In addition, when the production result of the predetermined effect indicates failure, the specific display change notification may not be performed after the predetermined effect indicating the failure is performed in the process of step S90803 (the icon may not be displayed). ).

  After performing the process of step S9083, or when it is determined in step S90802 that it is not the specific display effect period (step S90802; No), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not it is the notice effect period for executing the notice effect. Determination is made (step S90802). The notice effect period may be determined in advance in the effect control pattern determined by the process of step S90561 in accordance with the presence / absence of execution of the notice effect and the timing determined in the process of step S90560 of FIG. When it is determined that it is the notice effect period (step S90804; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 executes effect control of the notice effect (step S90805). Thereby, the notice effect is executed.

  After performing the process of step S90805, or when it is determined in step S90804 that it is not the notice effect period (step S90802; No), the effect control CPU 90120 is a reach effect period for executing the reach effect. Is determined (step S90806). The reach production period may be determined in advance, for example, in the production control pattern determined according to the variation pattern. When it is determined that it is the reach effect period (step S90806; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 performs control for executing the reach effect, such as displaying a background image for reach effect (step S90807).

  After execution of the process of step S90807, or when it is determined in step S90806 that it is not the reach production period (step S90806; No), the production control CPU 90120 performs setting in the production control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern. Based on this, control for executing an effect during the variable display including the variable display operation of the decorative symbols is performed (step S90808), and the variable display effect process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S90801 that the variable display time has elapsed (step S90801; Yes), it is determined whether or not a symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 9011 has been received (step S90809). At this time, if there is no reception of the symbol confirmation command (step S90809; No), the variable display effect processing is terminated and awaits.

  When the symbol confirmation command is received in step S90809 (step S90809; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120, for example, transmits a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 90123. Control is performed to derive and display a final stop symbol (definite decorative symbol) that is a display result in variable symbol display (step S90810). Subsequently, a predetermined time is set as a jackpot start designation command reception waiting time (step S90811). Next, the effect control CPU 90120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “3”, which is a value corresponding to the waiting process per special figure (step S90812), and ends the effect processing during variable display.

  FIG. 54 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect operation when a specific display effect and a failure effect as a pseudo-joint effect are executed. Specifically, an example of an effect operation in the case where the specific display effect is performed at the execution timing of “timing 1” illustrated in FIG. 48A and then the pseudo-continuous effect of the failure effect is performed is illustrated. When variable display is started as shown in FIG. 54A, a predetermined effect as a mini game is executed and a specific display effect is started as shown in FIG. 54B. In the illustrated example, a mode in which a character appears as a predetermined performance and shows success by rotating the displayed coin is shown as an example of the predetermined performance. It may be. In addition, as a result of a predetermined effect, there may be a result indicating failure as described above.

  When the predetermined effect progresses as shown in FIGS. 54 (c) to 54 (d) and success is shown as the result of the predetermined effect as shown in FIG. 54 (e), FIG. 54 (f) shows. As shown, the fact that the icon is displayed as the specific display change notification is notified (specific display change notification is executed). The specific display change notification is continuously performed for a predetermined period. When a predetermined period has elapsed, an icon is displayed as a specific display as shown in FIG. In the example shown in the figure, since the “pattern A” mode is shown, a star-shaped icon is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 54 (h), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905R. As shown in FIG. 54 (i), “middle” is displayed. In the decorative symbol display area 905 </ b> C, a pseudo-joint effect is performed to determine whether or not a “re” mark is temporarily displayed as a pseudo-chance pattern. Then, as shown in FIG. 54 (j), a failure effect is executed as a pseudo-continuous production effect, and a “re” mark as a pseudo-continuous chance symbol enters a reach state without temporarily stopping display. In the illustrated example, the reach state is shown after the pseudo-continuous effect (failure effect). However, the reach state may not be reached after the failure effect. In the example shown in FIG. 54 (j), the display position of the icon display as the specific display is moved, but the display position may not be moved. At this time, the priority of display may or may not prioritize icon display.

  As described above, when the failure effect is executed as the pseudo-continuous effect, the specific display effect is determined in order to determine the timing at which the execution period of the failure effect and the execution period of the specific display effect do not overlap as the execution timing of the specific display effect. The execution period and the execution period of failure production do not overlap. For this reason, it is possible to prevent a player from being discouraged due to a failure effect being performed after it is notified that an icon as a specific display is displayed (changes), and it is possible to prevent a decrease in game entertainment. In addition, instead of setting the timing at which the execution period of the failure effect and the execution period do not overlap as the execution timing of the specific display effect, the timing at which the execution period of the specific display effect and the execution period are not superimposed may be set as the execution timing of the failure effect. . That is, instead of adjusting the execution timing of the specific display effect, the execution timing of the failure effect may be adjusted. Specifically, the execution timing of the failure effect may be selected from a plurality of preset timings so that the execution period of the specific effect and the execution period of the failure effect do not overlap.

  FIG. 55 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect operation when a specific display effect and a successful effect as a pseudo-joint effect are executed. Specifically, an example of an effect operation in the case where the specific display effect is performed at the execution timing of “timing 2” illustrated in FIG. 55 (a) to 55 (f) are the same as FIGS. 54 (a) to 54 (f), and thus description thereof is omitted. In the example shown in FIG. 55, since the successful effect is performed as the pseudo-joint effect, the pseudo-joint effect is executed even after it is notified that the icon as the specific display is displayed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 55 (g), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905R. As shown in FIG. A pseudo-joint effect is performed in which whether or not a “re” mark is temporarily displayed as a pseudo-success chance symbol in the decorative symbol display area 905C. Then, as shown in FIG. 55 (i), a success effect is executed as a pseudo-joint effect, and a “re” mark as a pseudo-continuous chance symbol is displayed temporarily. Then, when the re-change is performed and a predetermined period has elapsed, an icon is displayed as the specific display as shown in FIG. In the illustrated example, an icon as a specific display is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed at the time of re-variation, but the elapsed timing of the predetermined period (that is, the timing of the specific display change) is an earlier timing. It may be. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 55 (h), a predetermined period may elapse during execution of the pseudo-joint effect, and icon display as a specific display may be performed. Further, when a successful effect is performed as a pseudo-joint effect and a specific display effect is performed, the elapse timing of the predetermined period may be set to the same timing as the end timing of the pseudo-joint effect. Further, the end timing of the pseudo-joint effect and the elapse timing of the predetermined period may be determined independently. In this way, when the success effect is executed as the pseudo-joint effect, the player is not discouraged. Can be determined as the execution timing of the specific performance.

  FIG. 56 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation when the specific display effect and the notice effect are executed. Specifically, an example of the effect operation in the case where the specific display effect is performed at the execution timing of “timing 1” shown in FIG. 52A and the notice effect is performed at the execution timing of “timing B” thereafter. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 52 (A), the execution period of the notice effect and the execution period of the pseudo-joint effect are shown. However, in the example shown in FIG. An example of the production operation of the pseudo-continuous production is omitted.

  When variable display is started as shown in FIG. 56 (a), a predetermined effect as a mini game is executed and a specific display effect is started as shown in FIG. 56 (b). In the illustrated example, a mode in which a character appears as a predetermined performance and shows success by rotating the displayed coin is shown as an example of the predetermined performance. It may be. In addition, as a result of a predetermined effect, there may be a result indicating failure as described above. When the predetermined effect progresses as shown in FIGS. 56 (c) to 56 (d) and success is shown as the result of the predetermined effect as shown in FIG. 56 (e), FIG. 56 (f) shows. As shown, the fact that the icon is displayed as the specific display change notification is notified (specific display change notification is executed). The specific display change notification is continuously performed for a predetermined period. When a predetermined period has elapsed, an icon is displayed as a specific display as shown in FIG. In the example shown in the figure, since the “pattern A” mode is shown, a star-shaped icon is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 56 (h), a cut-in notice is performed as a notice effect. In addition to the example shown in the figure, a cut-in notice in a different mode may be executed depending on the ratio of “big hit”, or a step-up notice or a battle effect may be performed in addition to the cut-in notice. It may be.

  In this way, when the specific display effect is executed, the execution period of the specific display effect and the advance notice are determined in order to determine the timing at which the execution period of the specific display effect and the execution period of the advance notice effect do not overlap as the execution timing of the advance notice effect. The production execution period does not overlap. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect of the presentation from being reduced due to the announcement effect being performed during a predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the specific display is displayed (changes). .

  FIG. 57 shows an example of an effect operation when an abnormality occurs at the timing “X” shown in FIG. Specifically, from the main board 9011 side, an abnormal command indicating that a winning to a variable winning device that is not actually opened is detected (winning abnormality) is indicated by the timing “X” shown in FIG. The example at the time of receiving at the timing after the specific display change alert | report in specific display effect was performed is shown. As shown in FIG. 57 (a), when the abnormal command is received at the timing of “X” shown in FIG. 52 after the specific display change notification is performed, the abnormal command is received in step S9075 shown in FIG. The abnormality notification process is performed in the process of step S9076. Then, as shown in FIG. 57 (b), an abnormality notification in a mode according to the type of the received abnormal command is performed by the processing (in the illustrated example, an example of displaying a message “abnormal winning prize!” Is shown). However, a warning sound or a lamp may be turned on in addition, or a different mode of notification may be performed according to a preset importance level of abnormality). Then, after the specific display change notification is continuously performed for a predetermined period, an icon as the specific display is displayed as shown in FIG. 57 (c) (the specific display changes). In the example shown in the figure, the abnormality notification is deleted at the timing shown in FIG. 57C. However, the abnormality notification is continuously performed until the operation for canceling the abnormality notification is performed. May be. Thus, in this embodiment, it is possible to notify abnormality even within a predetermined period after it is notified that the icon as the specific display is displayed (changed). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being able to grasp the game situation, and to prevent a decrease in gaming interest.

  FIG. 58 shows an example of an effect operation when the player makes an effect setting at the timing “X” shown in FIG. Specifically, an example in which an operation to increase the volume of the effect is performed by the player at the timing “X” shown in FIG. 52 (the timing after the specific display change notification in the specific display effect is performed). Show. As shown in FIG. 58 (a), after the specific display change notification is performed, when the effect setting is performed at the timing of “X” shown in FIG. 52 (when an operation by the player is detected), it is shown in FIG. It is determined in step S9077 that the effect setting has been performed, and the effect setting process is performed in the process of step S9078. As a result of this processing, notification that the volume setting has been changed as shown in FIG. 58B (in the example shown, the volume has been changed from “6” to “7”) is notified (setting change notification). ) And a process of increasing the volume output by the effect. Then, after the specific display change notification is continuously performed for a predetermined period, an icon as the specific display is displayed as shown in FIG. 57 (c) (the specific display changes). As shown in the figure, it is desirable that the notification that the volume setting has been changed is displayed in such a manner that the specific display change notification and the specific display are not recognized by the player. As described above, in this embodiment, it is possible to make settings related to effects even within a predetermined period after it is notified that an icon as a specific display is displayed (changes). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a reduction in the production effect. When the abnormality notification and the setting change notification are performed during the same period, the abnormality notification may be given priority (for example, the abnormality notification layer is set to the player side over the setting change layer). . Further, depending on the type of abnormality, there may be a priority that is not given priority over the setting change notification.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 901, the following effects can be obtained.

  The effect control CPU 90120 determines the timing at which the execution period of the failure effect and the execution period of the specific display effect do not overlap as the execution timing of the specific display effect. Therefore, the execution of the failure effect is restricted in a predetermined period after it is notified that the icon as the specific display is displayed (the specific display changes), and a decrease in the game entertainment is prevented. In addition, the timing set before the execution period of the pseudo-joint effect may not be selected as the execution timing of the specific display effect, and according to this, an icon as the specific display is displayed (the specific display changes). Since the execution of the failure effect is restricted after the notification is made, it is possible to further prevent the gaming interest from deteriorating. In addition, when a specific display effect is started, a predetermined effect as a mini game is performed, and a specific display change that notifies that an icon as a specific display is displayed when the effect result of the predetermined effect indicates success The notification is continuously performed for a predetermined period, and then the icon is displayed in the form determined in step S90603 in FIG. 44 (specific display changes). The effect control CPU 90120 determines the timing at which the execution period of the failure effect and the execution period of the specific display effect do not overlap as the execution timing of the specific display effect. Therefore, the execution of the failure effect is restricted during a period from when success is shown as the effect result of the predetermined effect until the icon is displayed (specific display changes). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interest. Further, when executing the specific display effect, the effect control CPU 90120 determines icons (combination of icons) to be displayed at different ratios according to the variable display result. Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's attention to which icon is displayed.

  Further, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the timing at which the execution period of the notice effect and the execution period of the specific display effect do not overlap as the execution timing of the notice effect. Therefore, the execution of the notice effect is restricted in a predetermined period after it is notified that the icon as the specific display is displayed (the specific display changes), and it is possible to prevent a reduction in the effect of the effect. Further, the effect control CPU 90120 can notify the abnormality even within a predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the specific display is displayed (the specific display changes). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being able to grasp the game situation, and to prevent a decrease in gaming interest. Furthermore, the effect control CPU 90120 can make settings related to the effect even within a predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the specific display is displayed (the specific display changes). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a reduction in the production effect. Further, the effect control CPU 90120 notifies that the setting related to the effect has been changed when the setting related to the effect is made (setting change notification). Therefore, the production effect can be improved.

  In addition, this invention is not limited to the said embodiment, A various deformation | transformation and application are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 901 may not have all the technical features described in the above embodiment, and the one described in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. The structure of the part may be provided. Further, at least some of the following modifications may be combined.

  In the above-described embodiment, in order to facilitate understanding, it has been described that the predetermined effect as a mini game always indicates success, but the effect result of the predetermined effect may indicate failure. Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the example which performs the predetermined | prescribed effect of the aspect shown in FIG. 54 etc. was shown, there may be several aspects of a predetermined | prescribed effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 59, two runners May compete (perform a race effect). FIG. 59 shows an example of an effect operation when a race effect is performed as a predetermined effect. Specifically, each runner is distinguished by its color. Each runner has a degree of expectation as to whether or not the predetermined performance is successful. The colors of each runner are blue, green, red, and rainbow. The success expectation is high in the order of rainbow> red> green> blue, and the race direction is the character of two runners with different success expectations (here: , Which are distinguished by color), it is only necessary to perform a race (competition), and either one wins, so that the success or failure of the predetermined performance is notified (the success expectation that the winning runner has this time) It is reported as a jackpot expectation). The race effect may be performed a plurality of times. Green and blue runners with a relatively low success expectation as the result of the predetermined performance belong to the first group, and rainbow and red runners with a relatively high success expectation as the result of the predetermined effect belong to the second group. Shall belong. The race effect is an effect for winning any one of the runners, and is also a kind of selection effect for selecting the one runner. Moreover, in the race production, both runners appearing may stop the race (a mode in which neither is selected).

  In this example, in a race production in which at least one of a blue runner and a green runner belonging to the first group in which the success expectation of the predetermined production is relatively low appears, the ratio of both runners canceling the race (first cancellation ratio) 59), a race production in which a red runner and a rainbow runner belonging to the second group appear relatively high in success expectation of the predetermined production as shown in FIG. 59 (that is, blue and green belonging to the first group). In the race production in which no runners appear), the rate at which both runners stop the race (second stop rate) is set higher. Thereby, even when the success expectation degree of a predetermined production is low, the race production in which a red runner and a rainbow runner appear can be executed, and the production effect can be enhanced. In particular, the rate at which the variable display result is “losing” is higher than the rate at which the variable display result is “big hit”, and the production result as the predetermined production often ends in failure (assuming that the specific display production is executed) However, there are many cases where the performance result of the predetermined performance is unsuccessful.) With the above configuration, the appearance rate of the race performance in which the red runner and the rainbow runner appear can be increased. Since it is expected that the degree of success expectation of the predetermined production is high every time the race production in which the runner and the rainbow runner appear is executed, the production effect can be enhanced. When a selection effect such as a race effect (as described above, a race effect is a type of selection effect) is executed, conventionally, an option is not selected from the presented options (runner color). Had a high success expectation (high expectation) that was not usually selected. However, as described above, usually, the variable display result is rarely a “big hit”, and the result of the effect as the predetermined effect often ends in failure, so the player touches the highly expected effect. This is rare and the production effect is not enhanced. Therefore, the production of the race (the run including both runners cancels) and the relationship between the first stop ratio and the second stop ratio suggests high expectations (red runner and rainbow runner appear) The production effect is enhanced because the race production) is easy to be executed.

  In this example, as an example of the predetermined effect as a mini game, the above-described race effect is executed and an effect of notifying the success expectation degree of the predetermined effect is shown as an example, but the race effect is not a predetermined effect in the specific display effect. In addition, it may be executed as an effect of notifying the variable display jackpot expectation level being executed (the effect of notifying the jackpot expectation level of the winning runner as the current jackpot expectation level). According to this, even in a variable display with a low jackpot expectation level, it is possible to execute a race effect in which a red runner and a rainbow runner belonging to the second group having a relatively high jackpot expectation level appear, and the effect can be achieved. Can be increased.

  In the above embodiment, an example in which an icon as a special image is displayed as the specific display effect is shown. However, as described above, the icon is displayed as the specific display effect. You may perform the production which changes a display (it increases in steps). Moreover, the effect (active display change effect) which changes the aspect of the active display corresponding to a variable display according to the said specific display effect may be performed. Furthermore, at the time of super reach production (super reach production), the active display mode and the specific display mode may be changed to a special mode. Hereinafter, a description will be given with reference to FIGS. Specifically, in the active display change effect in this example, the display mode of the active display is changed from the normal mode (white in this example) to “first mode (blue)”, “second mode (green)” and “third”. It suffices if the display can be changed to “mode (red)”. When the final display mode of the meter display as the specific display is “first stage” or “second stage”, the final display mode of the active display is “first mode (blue)”, and the meter display When the final display mode of “3rd stage” or “4th stage” is set, the final display mode of active display is “second mode (green)”, and the final display mode of meter display is “10th stage”. In the case of “stage”, the final display mode of the active display is “third mode (red)”.

  In FIG. 60, a specific display effect is performed, the meter display changes from the normal mode to the first display mode, and an active display change effect in which the active display changes to the first mode in accordance with the change of the meter display is executed. An example of the presentation operation in the case of being performed is shown. As shown in FIG. 60A, when the variable display of decorative symbols is started in the image display device 905, the active display is displayed in the active display area 909F. In the example of FIG. 60A, the active display is displayed in the normal mode (white). Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (B), when the specific display effect is executed, an effect of blinking and displaying the meter display 9090 is executed as the predetermined effect. Then, character A 90200 appears (FIG. 60C), and the display mode of the meter display changes to the first stage display mode in which the color of one scale among 10 has changed (FIG. 60D). Thereafter, the display mode of the active display is changed to the first mode (in the example of FIG. 60E, the color is shown by characters) and displayed according to the change of the meter display (FIG. 60 ( E)).

  Next, specific examples of the super reach effect, the specific display effect, and the active display change effect will be described with reference to FIGS. Among these, FIG. 61 shows an example of the effect operation when the super reach effect is executed independently (the specific display effect and the active display change effect are not executed). FIG. 62 and FIG. 63 show an example of the effect operation when the specific display effect and the active display change effect are executed when the super reach effect is executed.

  First, with reference to FIG. 61, the case where a super reach production is performed independently will be described. As shown in FIG. 61A, when variable display of decorative symbols is started in the image display device 905, an active display is displayed in the active display area 909F. In the example of FIG. 61A, the active display is displayed in the normal mode (white). Next, after the “left” decorative design is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 61 (B), the “right” decorative design is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 61 (C), and the left and right decorative designs are displayed. Are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (in this example, symbol “7”), and a reach state occurs. Next, at the time of development to super reach, a character display such as “super reach!” Is displayed as shown in FIG. 61 (D), and the race of the racing car is started as shown in FIG. 61 (E). Such an effect display is started, and a super reach effect is started. As shown in FIGS. 61D to 61G, in this embodiment, during the execution of the super reach effect, the effect symbol variation display is reduced and displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen of the image display device 905. It shall be.

  Next, when the execution timing of the predetermined cut-in effect is reached during execution of the super reach effect, as shown in FIG. 61 (F), the predetermined cut-in effect is executed during the execution of the super reach effect. In this example, as shown in FIG. 61 (F), in the image display device 905, a predetermined character image 90201 different from the racing performance display of the racing car so far is cut in, and a line such as “chance!” A predetermined cut-in effect is executed in a manner in which the display is displayed. In this example, the predetermined cut-in effect is a part of the super reach effect. For example, as in the above embodiment, the predetermined cut-in effect may be configured as an effect different from the super reach effect. Further, for example, the super reach effect may be interrupted and a predetermined cut-in effect may be executed.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 61 (A), even when the super reach effect is executed alone, the meter display 9090 is also displayed when variable display of decorative symbols is started. However, when a predetermined cut-in effect is started, the meter display 9090 is erased as shown in FIG. As such, in this example, since the meter display 9090 is displayed at least until the predetermined cut-in effect is started, the meter that changes the execution timing of the predetermined cut-in effect and the specific display mode to the special mode. It is possible to make it impossible to recognize whether a predetermined cut-in effect or a special change in meter display is executed until the execution timing of a special change in display (details will be described later) is reached. An expectation can be given to the fact that the meter display changes due to a special change. Note that the meter display 9090 may be continuously displayed even after a predetermined cut-in effect is started (for example, the meter level does not change). Further, for example, the meter display 9090 may not be displayed when the super reach effect is executed independently and the special display change effect or the active display change effect is not executed.

  Next, when a predetermined cut-in effect execution period has elapsed, the display returns to the race car race effect display again, and as shown in FIG. Display. When the variable display time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 61 (H), the same symbol as the left and right ornament symbols (in this example, symbol “7”) is stopped and displayed as a “medium” ornament symbol. Is derived and displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 62 and FIG. 63, the case where the special change of meter display and the active display change effect are executed as the specific display effect when the super reach effect is executed will be described. In the example of FIGS. 62 and 63, a special change of the meter display is executed as the specific display effect, the meter display changes from the normal mode to the tenth stage display mode, and the active display is changed to the third display according to the change of the meter display. In addition, the meter display and the active display are changed to the special display of the third special display mode. In the specific display effect, the display mode of the meter display is changed to the first stage display mode in which the color of one scale of 10 is changed as shown in FIG. When the special change of the meter display is executed, the display mode changes from the normal mode to the 10th stage display mode. Thus, the special change of the meter display in the specific display effect is called a special change effect.

  As shown in FIG. 62A, when the variable display of decorative symbols is started in the image display device 905, the active display is displayed in the active display area 909F. In the example of FIG. 62A, the active display is displayed in the normal mode (white). Next, after the “left” decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 62 (B), the “right” decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 62 (C), and the “left” and “right” ”Is displayed in a stopped state with the same symbol (in this example, symbol“ 7 ”), and a reach state occurs. Next, at the time of development to super reach, a character display such as “super reach!” Is displayed as shown in FIG. 62 (D), and the racing car race is started as shown in FIG. 62 (E). Such an effect display is started, and a super reach effect is started. As shown in FIGS. 62D to 62I and FIG. 63J, in this example, the right side of the display screen of the image display device 905 is displayed during the execution of the super reach effect and the special change effect. It is assumed that the decorative symbol variation display is reduced and displayed at the lower end. Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (F), immediately before the specific display effect is started, a notification effect that blinks and displays the meter display 9090 is executed.

  Next, after the start of the super reach effect, when the execution timing of the special change effect as the specific display effect is reached, as shown in FIG. 62 (G), the super reach effect is interrupted and the special change effect is executed. In this example, as shown in FIG. 62 (G), the special change effect is executed in the image display device 905 in such a manner that an effect display is made as if a storm has arrived and a thunder is sounding. In this example, the special change effect is different from the super reach effect, and the super reach effect is interrupted and the special change effect is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 62 (H), in the image display device 905, an effect display as if a lightning strike has hit the meter display 9090, and the display mode of the meter display as the specific display is 10. The display changes to the tenth display mode in which the color of all of the scales has changed. In the example shown in FIG. 62 (H), an example of changing to the tenth stage display mode in which the color of all graduations has changed is shown, but it is not necessary to change to the tenth stage display mode at once. For example, a special mini-game effect for changing the display mode is performed while the super-reach effect is interrupted or executed in a low-priority layer, and the level changes depending on the result of the mini-game effect. You may make it different. Moreover, you may change a display mode in steps by performing a mini game effect continuously.

  Next, the super reach production is resumed, and as shown in FIG. 62 (I), the display returns to the race car race production display again, and the display mode of the active display is changed to the third mode (FIG. In the example of 62 (I), the color is indicated by characters). Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (J), an effect display is made as if the teammate's racing car finished first, and the meter display and the active display are the special display (“V”) in the third special display mode. Is displayed in a special display 202) indicating the characters. When the variable display time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 63 (K), the same symbols as the left and right effect symbols (in this example, symbol “7”) are stopped and displayed as “medium” ornament symbols. Is derived and displayed.

  In this example, a race car race effect display is performed as a super reach effect, a predetermined character image 90201 is effected as a predetermined cut-in effect, and a storm arrives as a special change effect. Although the case where the effect display as if reverberating is shown is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, as a super reach effect, a battle effect in which an enemy and a friend character perform a battle may be executed, or a moving image of a predetermined story may be displayed, and various effects can be considered. Further, for example, a button effect accompanied by a button operation or the like may be executed as a predetermined cut-in effect, as long as a display different from the previous effect display during the super reach effect is cut in in some form. . In addition, for example, an effect display in which a character different from the meter display change effect may appear as a special change effect, or a button effect accompanied by a button operation may be performed, and various effects can be considered.

  According to this, it is possible to display a display (in this example, a meter display) that suggests the degree of expectation by changing the aspect in a plurality of stages as the specific display. In addition, when a specific effect (in this example, a super reach effect) is executed, a special change effect (in this example, a special change in meter display in the specific display effect) can be executed to change the specific display mode. It is. Also, in this case, the special change effect can be executed in a mode that has priority over the specific effect (in this example, the super reach effect is interrupted and the special change effect is executed). For this reason, the specific display mode can be changed in a mode that has priority over the specific performance, so that even when the specific performance is executed, the change in the specific display mode can be noted. In other words, if both the specific effect and the change of the specific display mode are executed, the player may pay attention to the specific effect and cannot fully pay attention to the change of the specific display mode. Since the mode of the specific display can be changed according to the mode, the change in the mode of the specific display can be noted even when the specific effect is executed. In addition, in this example, an example is shown in which an effect of changing the meter display (increase in steps) is performed as the specific display effect and an active display change effect is performed in accordance with the specific display effect. Instead of this, the icons shown in the above embodiment may be displayed. For example, when displaying icons step by step, a special change in meter display is executed as a specific display effect, and when the display mode changes from the normal mode to the tenth level display mode, the display mode of active display is third. Instead of being displayed in the form (in the example of FIG. 62 (I), the color is indicated by characters), the icon is displayed in the highest-level aspect (the aspect with the highest jackpot expectation). May be.

  In this example, the display mode of the active display changes according to the change of the meter display. However, for example, the display mode of any one of the pending displays changes according to the change of the meter display. It may be configured as follows. In this case, it may be realized by associating and executing a pre-reading effect that changes the display mode of the hold display and a specific display effect (including a special change effect) based on a command at the time of starting winning. Specifically, the final display mode of the meter display and the final display mode of the hold display are determined based on the command at the start winning prize, and the effect is executed based on the determination result. Further, in the case of a configuration in which the display mode of any of the hold displays changes corresponding to the meter display, a specific display effect (in the period from when the hold display is displayed until the corresponding variable display starts. (Including special change effects) may be executable.

  In addition, for example, the display mode of the hold display can be changed by the pre-reading effect, and when the hold display corresponding to the variable display to be started is displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode, the display mode is active according to the display mode. You may make it display a display. Specifically, when the hold display corresponding to the variable display to be started is displayed in the first mode (blue circle display), the active display is displayed in the first mode (blue circle display). . In this case, the display mode of the hold display changes according to the change in the meter display, and the active display that takes over the display mode of the hold display changes according to the further change in the meter display. Good. In this case, the final display mode of the meter display and the final display mode of the active display may be determined based on a command at the time of start winning at the time of starting winning, or may be determined in the variable display start setting process. Also good. In this case, the specific display effect (including the special change effect) may be executable during the period from when the hold display is displayed until the corresponding variable display ends.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, the setting regarding an effect is also possible within the predetermined period after it was alert | reported that the icon as a specific display was displayed, and the volume of an effect is changed as an example of the setting regarding the said effect. However, the setting related to the production is not limited to this. The setting related to the performance may be performed based on an operation by the player, and for example, the selection of the music to be output or the type of background may be changed. In addition, the setting related to the production may include setting the auto button function to be valid or invalid.

  Note that the “auto button” is a function that executes processing assuming that the push button 9031B is operated, although the push button 9031B is not actually operated by the player. In this example, the button notice effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the notice display is displayed based on the detection of the single operation or the repeated operation of the push button 9031B in the button notice effect. When the function is set to be effective, even if the push button 9031B is not operated, the process is executed as if the push button 9031B is operated once or repeatedly in the button notice effect, and a notice display is displayed. . In this example, the single operation is that the push button 9031B is operated once, and the continuous operation is that the push button 9031B is operated a plurality of times in succession.

  Further, in this embodiment, “automatic striking” means that the push button 9031B is actually continuously pressed (long-pressed) by the player, but the push button 9031B is also pressed multiple times. This is a function of detecting that the button is continuously pressed (a state where the button is continuously pressed (a state where the push button 9031B is pressed and a state where the push button 9031B is not pressed is repeated a plurality of times)). In this example, when the function of the auto button is invalid, a notice display may be displayed based on detection of a continuous hit operation of the push button 9031B in the button notice effect, but the push button 9031B is long pressed. Even in this case, a notice display is displayed on the assumption that the continuous hitting operation has been detected.

  In this example, the effect setting process in step S9078 of FIG. 41 is executed, so that arbitrary timing (for example, a period during which a customer waiting demonstration is displayed, a period during which a decorative symbol is variably displayed, During the period, it is possible to set whether to enable or disable the function of the auto button based on the operation of the push button 9031B by the player. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 58, an example is shown in which the volume setting is changed by the player at the timing “X” shown in FIG. 52, but the auto button function is enabled as an effect setting instead of the volume setting. It is possible to set whether or not to be invalid. That is, it is possible to set whether to enable or disable the function of the auto button even within a predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the specific display is displayed. Note that it is also possible to display whether the auto button is valid or invalid within a predetermined period after notification that the icon as the specific display is displayed. In this example, the automatic continuous hitting function is always valid. However, as with the auto button function, it may be configured to enable or disable the setting.

  FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a display mode when the auto button function is set to be valid or invalid. In FIG. 64, the display screen changes in the order of (1), (2), and (3). In FIG. 64 (1), it is assumed that the function of the auto button is disabled. As shown in FIG. 64 (1), when the player presses the push button 9031B for a long time while the decorative symbol variable display is being executed, the auto button is displayed as shown in FIG. 64 (2). The image display device 905 displays a character string such as “auto button enabled” and displays that the auto button function is enabled. In addition, at this time, it is only necessary to perform control for outputting the auto button effective sound effect from the speakers 908L and 908R and causing the push button 9031B to emit light in a special light emission mode.

  If the player performs a push operation (single operation) on the push button 9031B while the auto button function is enabled, the auto button function is disabled as shown in FIG. 64 (3). In addition, a character string such as “auto button invalid” is displayed on the image display device 905, and a display indicating that the function of the auto button is set to invalid is performed. At this time, it is only necessary to perform control for outputting the auto button invalid effect sound from the speakers 908L and 908R and causing the push button 9031B to emit light in the normal light emission mode.

  In the example of FIG. 64, the setting of the auto button function is changed during the decorative display of the decorative design. However, as described above, by performing the same operation, not only during the variable display of the decorative design, The setting of the auto button function can be changed even during a customer waiting demonstration period or a jackpot game period. For example, when the setting of the auto button function is changed from the menu screen, the image display device 905 displays that the auto button function is disabled or enabled as in the example shown in FIG. Control to output the auto button invalid effect sound or auto button effective effect sound from the speakers 908L and 908R, or to control the push button 9031B to emit light in the normal light emission mode or the special light emission mode. May be.

  Next, the difference between the case where the automatic continuous hit by the long press operation is performed and the case where the automatic continuous hit by the auto button function is performed will be described. FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram showing a comparative example of automatic continuous hitting by a long press operation and automatic continuous hitting by an auto button function. In the example shown in FIG. 65, it is assumed that execution of the button notice effect A is determined as the button notice effect.

  In “button notice effect A” and “button notice effect B”, when the operation valid period is started, a gauge display corresponding to the number of operations of the push button 9031B is displayed, and the operation of the push button 9031B is detected. Each time, the display is updated so that the scale of the gauge display is reduced by one. When the number of detected operations reaches a predetermined number of times (that is, when the scale of the gauge display becomes 0), it is determined that the operation condition is satisfied, and a notice display (for example, “Intense heat!” Or “Chance! "Is displayed).

  When the function of the auto button is invalid and execution of the button notice effect A is determined, if the long press operation of the push button 9031B is started during the execution of the button notice effect, the long press operation is started. When 4 seconds have elapsed, detection by automatic continuous hitting is started, and during the detection by automatic continuous hitting, the number of operations by the push button 9031B is treated as being increased by one each time 1.0 second has elapsed. In addition, when the execution of the button notice effect B is determined, if the long press operation of the push button 9031B is started during the execution of the button notice effect, the automatic operation is performed when 2 seconds elapse after the start of the long press operation. Detection by repeated hitting is started, and during the detection by automatic repeated hitting, the number of operations by the push button 9031B is treated as being increased by one every 0.5 seconds. Note that, regardless of whether the button notice effect A or the button notice effect B is executed, every time a push operation of the push button 9031B is detected when a normal continuous operation of the push button 9031B is performed. The number of operations is treated as increasing by one.

  Further, if the function of the auto button is valid, when the button notice effect A is executed, even if the push button 9031B is not pressed for a long time, 1.0 second has elapsed since the start of the operation valid period. Every time the operation is performed, the number of operations by the push button 9031B is treated as being increased by one. Further, when the button notice effect B is executed, the number of operations by the push button 9031B is increased every 0.5 seconds from the start of the operation valid period even if the push button 9031B is not pressed for a long time. Treated as incremented by one. Although details will be described later, when the button notice effect C is executed, even when the push button 9031B is not operated, a predetermined timing in the middle of the operation effective period (for example, the operation effective period is 6 seconds). In this case, when it reaches 3 seconds from the start of the operation valid period, it is treated that the number of operations by the push button 9031B has been performed once.

  For example, depending on whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”, the automatic repeated hit start time and the automatic repeated hit detection period may be selected from a plurality of options at different ratios. For example, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the automatic continuous hitting start time is determined as 0 second at a rate of 50%, and determined as 2 seconds at a rate of 50%. May be determined at 0% at a rate of 70% and at 2% at a rate of 30%. In addition, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the automatic repeated hit detection interval is determined to be 0.5 seconds at a rate of 70%, and is determined to be 1 second at a rate of 30%. In this case, it may be determined to be 0.5 seconds at a rate of 50% and to be determined to be 1 second at a rate of 50%. In addition, depending on whether the variable display result is “big hit” or not, for the configuration to select the automatic repeated hit start time and automatic repeated hit detection period from multiple choices at different rates, the automatic repeated hit with the auto button function and the long press operation It may be applied to only one of automatic repeated hits by or may be applied to both.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 65 (A), in the case where automatic continuous hitting is performed by a long press operation, a predetermined start waiting period after the long press operation of the push button 31 is started after the start of the operation effective period. After 4 seconds (in this example), the continuous hit determination is turned on (that is, the process is executed assuming that the continuous hit operation is performed, and the scale of the gauge display decreases).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 65 (B), when the automatic repeated hitting by the auto button function is performed, the repeated hit determination is turned on immediately after the operation effective period starts (that is, the operation effective period Immediately after the start, the process is executed assuming that the hammering operation is being performed repeatedly, and the scale of the gauge display decreases). With such a configuration, when the auto button function is enabled and the long press operation is not performed, and when the auto button function is disabled and the long press operation is performed, the production (for example, reduction in the scale of the gauge display) ) Can be performed at different timings, and the production effect can be enhanced.

  Further, in this example, when the execution of the button notice effect B is determined, when the automatic continuous hit by the long press operation is performed, the long press operation of the push button 9031B is performed after the start of the operation valid period. When a predetermined start waiting period (in this example, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the start, the continuous hit determination is turned on, and when automatic continuous hit is performed by the auto button function, the continuous hit is immediately after the start of the operation effective period. Judgment is turned on. For this reason, in both cases of button announcement effects A and B, the auto button function is valid and the long press operation is not performed, and the auto button function is invalid and the long press operation is performed. The timing at which (for example, a reduction in the scale of the gauge display) is executed is different.

  In the above embodiment, for the sake of easy understanding, it has been described that the predetermined effect as a mini-game always indicates success, but the effect result of the predetermined effect may indicate failure, and execution of the predetermined effect Depending on the timing, the rate at which the performance results of the predetermined performance indicate success may be different. Specifically, since the execution timing of the predetermined effect varies depending on the execution timing of the specific display effect, it is only necessary that the ratio at which the effect result of the predetermined effect indicates success depends on the execution timing of the specific display effect. In addition, for example, even when the specific display effect is executed at the execution timing of “timing 1” shown in FIG. 48, there may be a plurality of execution timings of the predetermined effect. Depending on, the ratio of the production results indicating success may be varied. According to this, the player's attention can be gathered with respect to the start timing of the predetermined effect.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the ratio of the variable display result to “big hit” varies depending on the combination of icons displayed as the specific display is an example. For example, in a gaming machine capable of executing an active display change effect that changes the display mode of the active display corresponding to the variable display and a pre-read effect that changes the display mode of the hold display, the display mode of the active display or the hold display is specified. The ratio at which the variable display result is “big hit” may be different depending on the combination of display modes (number and combination of icons). According to this, the production effect can be improved.

  Further, in the above embodiment, by determining the timing at which the execution period of the notice effect and the execution period of the specific display effect do not overlap as the execution timing of the notice effect, the icon as the specific display is displayed (specific display is In the example, the execution of the notice effect is limited in a predetermined period after the change is notified. For example, although the notice effect is restricted, the expectation of jackpot as one notification is extremely high (here, , “Big hit” confirmed) The special effect can be executed, and the special effect is not limited even in a predetermined period after it is notified that the icon as the specific display is displayed (the specific display changes) Also good. In this case, with respect to the execution timing of the special effect, for example, the execution of the special effect is performed with reference to a table in which the execution period of the specific display effect is not selectable as shown in FIG. The timing may be determined from a plurality of timings. Note that the special effect may be an effect in which the hold display is changed by the player's operation in addition to the one-shot notification. According to this, there is a sharpness between the effect that is restricted and the effect that is not so, and the effect of the effect can be improved. In addition, the example of the execution of the notice effect is shown as an example in which the execution of the notice effect is not performed (prohibited), but also includes a case where the notice effect is executed in a manner that is difficult for the player to recognize. In the case of executing without prohibiting the execution of the notice effect, the icon display as the specific display is given priority over the notice effect (for example, the icon display layer is set to the player side over the layer of the notice effect). Good. According to this, it can prevent that a player becomes difficult to visually recognize a specific display, and can improve a production effect.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the example in which abnormality alert | report is possible within the predetermined period after alert | reporting that the icon as a specific display is displayed was shown, this is an example. In addition to the abnormality notification, it is only necessary to be able to appropriately notify information relating to the game as a special notification, such as a hitting notification, a ball notification, and a fourth symbol. It should be noted that the ball notification is a recognizable display of the number of balls that the player has acquired (the number of balls that have been acquired), and the special notification only needs to be updated each time the number of balls that have been acquired increases. Normally, the number of winning balls is displayed on the high base and updated after a big hit, so it is updated within a predetermined period after the notification that the icon as a specific display is displayed. However, for the payout due to the game ball winning in the winning opening during the high base, the number of winning balls may be updated, which is applicable in such a case. Further, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine that increases the number of player's winnings by frequently setting the variable display result to “small hit” during the high base. According to this, it becomes possible to update the number of obtained balls even within a predetermined period after it is notified that the icon as the specific display is displayed, and it is possible to suitably inform the player of the number of earned balls. . Note that the hitting notification only needs to be a recognizable display of the area where the game ball is launched to the player, such as right-handed notification and left-handed notification. Moreover, the 4th symbol should just display so that a player can recognize whether it is variably displaying by blinking a lamp, for example.

  In the above embodiment, in order to notify the effect control board 9012 of the change pattern indicating the change mode such as the change time, the type of reach effect, and the presence / absence of pseudo-continuous, one change pattern command is given when the change is started. Although an example of transmission is shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control board 9012 by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notification by two commands, the game control microcomputer 90100 uses the first command to indicate whether there is a pseudo-ream, a slip effect, etc. before reaching (so-called if not reach). A command indicating the variation time and variation mode before the second stop) is transmitted, and the second command has reached the reach such as the type of reach and presence / absence of re-lottery effect (if the reach does not reach, the so-called first You may make it transmit the command which shows the fluctuation | variation time and fluctuation | variation aspect (after 2 stop). In this case, on the side of the effect control board 9012, the effect control in the change display may be performed based on the change time derived from the combination of the two commands. The game control microcomputer 90100 notifies the change time by each of the two commands, and the effect control board 9012 selects the specific change mode executed at each timing. Also good. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After sending the first command, a certain period of time has passed (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be changed as appropriate. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced.

  In the above-described embodiment, for example, a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating “0” to “9”, symbols indicating “−”, or lighting patterns of segments not limited to numbers and symbols, etc. An example of variable display is shown. However, the variable display result displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B and the special symbol variably displayed are a number indicating "0" to "9" and a symbol indicating "-". It is not limited to what consists of etc. For example, a lighting pattern during variable display of a special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off, and a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off and one pattern in which at least some LEDs are lit (for example, a lost symbol) Are also included in the special symbol variable display (in this case, the one pattern (eg, the lost symbol) appears to blink). Further, the special symbol displayed during variable display may be different from the special symbol displayed as the variable display result. As a special symbol variable display, for example, “−” is blinked, and as a variable display result, other special symbols (“7” for “big hit”, “1” for “losing”, etc. ) Is also included in the special symbol variable display. In addition, the variable display of the decorative design includes a blinking display or scroll display of one type of decorative design. The lighting pattern during the variable display of the normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are extinguished, and a pattern in which all the LEDs are extinguished and one pattern in which at least some of the LEDs are lit (for example, a lost symbol). It is also included in the variable display of normal symbols to repeat alternately. Also, the decorative symbol or normal symbol displayed during variable display may be different from the decorative symbol or normal symbol displayed as a variable display result.

  In the above-described embodiment, the ratio (including the determination ratio, etc., the same applies to the probability) may include 0%. In other words, the ratio and probability may be between 0 and 100%. For example, to make one ratio different from the other ratio means that one ratio is, for example, 30%, the other ratio is 70%, and the other ratio is, for example, 0%, and the other ratio is 100%. Including. Further, the sum of one ratio and the other ratio may not be 100% (there may be a part that is not included in either one or the other and may have a predetermined ratio). In addition, when the ratio of the other is higher than the ratio of one, the ratio of one is set to 0% and the ratio of the other is set to 100%. For example, in the above, the variable display pattern selected on the other side is selected on the other side to differentiate the variable display pattern determination rate in the specific period after the advantageous state from the variable display pattern determination ratio outside the specific period. This includes cases where the variable display pattern selected on one side and the variable display pattern selected on the other side partially overlap or do not completely overlap. These may be defined by the contents of a table that defines the ratio.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 901 is not limited to the one that performs probability change control in which the big hit type is “probable change” when a big hit symbol indicating a predetermined number is derived and displayed as a variable symbol display result of the special symbol. A probability variation determination device type pachinko gaming machine in which probability variation control is performed based on the fact that a game ball has passed through a specific area in an attacker provided in the game machine may be used.

  In addition, the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 901, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, the various display operations including the display operation of the display image in the display area of the image display device 905, etc. depart from the spirit of the present invention. Changes and modifications can be arbitrarily made without departing from the scope. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of prize balls in response to detection of a winning ball, but responds to detection of a winning ball by enclosing the gaming ball. It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that gives a score or a game machine that is controlled to a big hit game state when passing a specific passing gate. Furthermore, the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using game values (medals etc.), and a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified can be displayed in a variable manner. The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine in which one game is completed when a display result is derived to the variable display device and a winning can be generated according to the display result derived by the variable display device.

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 901. It is also possible to adopt a form that is distributed by pre-installing the storage device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a removable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Game board 3 Frame 4A, 4B for game machines Special symbol display device 5 Image display device 6A Normal winning ball device 6B Normal variable winning ball device 7 Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R Speaker 9 Game effect lamp 11 Main Board 12 Production control board 13 Audio control board 14 Lamp control board 15 Relay board 20 Normal symbol display 21 Gate switch 22A, 22B Start switch 23 Count switch 100 Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ROM
102, 122 RAM
103 CPU
104, 124 Random number circuit 105, 125 I / O
120 CPU for effect control
123 Display control unit 901 Pachinko machine 902 Game board 903 Special frame display device 905 Image display device 906A Normal winning ball device 906B Normal variable winning ball device 907 Special variable winning ball device 8L, 908R Speaker 909 Game Effect lamp 9011 Main board 9012 Production control board 9013 Audio control board 9014 Lamp control board 9015 Relay board 9020 Normal display 9021 Gate switch 22A, 22B Start switch 9023 Count switch 9031A Stick controller 9031B Push button 90100 Game control microcomputer 90101 , 90121 ROM
90102, 90122 RAM
90103 CPU
90104, 90124 Random number circuit 105, 125 I / O
90120 CPU for effect control
90123 Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of variable display and control to an advantageous state,
A selection means for presenting a plurality of selection candidates and selecting one of the plurality of selection candidates presented;
Specific display means for performing specific display in which the display mode can be changed stepwise according to the degree of advantage;
Special notification executing means capable of executing special notification for notifying information related to a game,
The selection candidates that can be presented include at least a first selection candidate and a second selection candidate that is more advantageous than the first selection candidate when selected,
The selection means is configured such that when the plurality of presented selection candidates do not include the first selection candidate, any of the plurality of selection candidates is higher in proportion than when the plurality of presented selection candidates include the first selection candidate. Do not select
The specific display means changes the display mode of the specific display when a predetermined period has elapsed after it is notified that the display mode of the specific display is changed,
The notification execution means can execute the special notification even in a predetermined period after it is notified that the display mode of the specific display is changed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.